Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos
Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos
Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
Richard Couto<br />
Henry Pachter<br />
Abbas Amanat<br />
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Ali Hossaini<br />
summer 2003<br />
volume two - issue three<br />
Taxing Democracy: Politics and the<br />
Bush Tax Cut<br />
Lies and the Distortion of Democracy<br />
Wither Iraq: From Despotism to Occupation<br />
The Incidental Liberation of Iraq<br />
Who Are the Palestinians?<br />
Iran’s Social Revolution<br />
Rethinking C. Wright Mills<br />
Vision of the Gods<br />
Photography by Ira Cohen<br />
Fiction by Thomas de Zengotita<br />
Poetry by Andy Clausen<br />
REVIEWS:<br />
Terror and Liberalism, by Paul Berman<br />
reviewed by Kurt Jacobsen<br />
The History of Socialism by Joshua Muravchik<br />
reviewed by Jason Schulman<br />
Why George Orwell?, by Christopher Hitchens<br />
reviewed by Desmond MacNamara<br />
Straw Dogs by John Gray<br />
reviewed by Diana Judd<br />
The Specter of Democracy, by Dick Howard<br />
reviewed by Robert Antonio<br />
© <strong>Logos</strong> 2003
F<br />
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
Taxing Democracy:<br />
Politics and the Bush Tax Cut<br />
by<br />
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003<br />
The science of economics is a political science.<br />
—Max Weber<br />
ew domestic political issues have been debated with more passion than<br />
the tax cut that was proposed by the Bush administration and recently<br />
passed by Congress. The tax cuts have been characterized as everything from<br />
a giveaway to the rich to a stimulus package for an ailing economy. Political<br />
rhetoric frequently coalesces with “social science,” statistics and economic<br />
argumentation, but—interestingly enough—the political character of<br />
decision-making on tax policy has tended to disappear from the public<br />
debate. What I think is happening, however, is not simply a rethinking of tax<br />
codes or a move away from the redistributional character of the post-war<br />
American welfare state. Rather, there is a reformation of American democracy<br />
through the policy prescriptions of the Bush administration where the acute<br />
separation of economics from politics may very well lead to an erosion of the<br />
democratic character of the United States. What characterizes the political<br />
rhetoric of the Bush administration and neoconservatives?<br />
Without question, linking taxes and democracy has been a consistent theme<br />
in American politics. From the birth of the republic, through the massive<br />
inequities of the Gilded Age and the great redistributive policies of the New<br />
Deal, the War On Poverty and the Great Society, there has always existed a<br />
consistent link between the emergence of the state as a participant in the<br />
public sphere and the expansion of democracy, especially in economic terms.<br />
But recently, the view has emerged that the expansion of the state and the<br />
services it provides, its public goods—what we commonly call the welfare<br />
state—stands in sharp contradiction to the values of liberty, freedom and<br />
democracy. The more the state encroaches on me, the citizen, the less free I<br />
am; the less money I am able to keep from what I earn, the more the<br />
government is interfering with my liberty. This is the essential rhetoric of<br />
anti-tax conservatives like Grover Norquist, one of George W. Bush’s top<br />
political advisors:
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
Look, the center right coalition in American politics today is<br />
best understood as a coalition of groups and individuals [and]<br />
the issue that brings them to politics [is that] what they want<br />
from the government is to be left alone. Taxpayers, don’t raise<br />
my taxes. Property owners, don’t restrict or limit my property.<br />
Home-schoolers, let me educate my own kids. Gun owners,<br />
don’t restrict my Second Amendment rights. All communities<br />
of faith, Evangelical Christians, conservative Catholics,<br />
Mormons, Muslims, Orthodox Jews, people want to practice<br />
their own religion and be left alone to raise their own kids. 1<br />
Known as the “leave us alone” coalition, such is the ideological context that<br />
includes the politics of the most recent tax cuts; an ideology grounded in a<br />
much broader conception of society, politics and culture; one premised on a<br />
curious mix of libertarian individualism with a provincial, parochial<br />
communitarianism. But this is merely a surface phenomenon. It appeals only<br />
to the conservative sentiments of a public that has been ideologically dragged<br />
to the right over the past two and a half decades. But the material impact of<br />
the tax cuts are typically felt at the local levels. This is, in part, a result of tax<br />
cutting policies which begin at the federal level and have trickled down over<br />
the years into the policies of states.<br />
As federal tax cuts increased throughout the 1980s and 1990s there was an<br />
increased pressure states and cities to shoulder the cost of schools and other<br />
social services. The politics of the tax cut must therefore be seen first and<br />
foremost as a broad attempt to reorient the way in which American<br />
democracy was heading since the New Deal which itself was based on the<br />
realization that the effects of capitalism on society required the intervention<br />
of the state in order to counteract the effects of what <strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
has called the “whip of the market” from staggering economic inequality and<br />
poverty reduction and cyclical economic crises. Later, issues ranging from<br />
pollution to enhanced social services and programs were on the minds of the<br />
public and began to enter the political agenda of the Democratic Party. It was<br />
a conception of democracy that realized that unequal economic power<br />
rendered “equal” political rights practically meaningless and that only<br />
through the fair distribution of social wealth could political and social rights<br />
truly be extended and realized.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
One of the main functions of tax policy is the redistribution of income and it<br />
is around this issue that the rallying cry for those who seek the reformation of<br />
the tax code in America is organized. Whatever else taxes may actually do as<br />
an instrument of public policy, the core argument used for the tax cuts has<br />
consistently been to link economic productivity (the welfare of everyone) and<br />
personal income (the welfare of the individual or family). It is, in so many<br />
ways, a flawless political strategy—one that hits Americans where they feel<br />
they need it the most, even though the numbers do not work out in their<br />
benefit. Most taxpayers therefore see their responsibility as restricted to the<br />
sphere of the local. In this sense, an element of racism often enters the picture<br />
once largely white and better-off municipalities pay taxes that are<br />
redistributed to inner city neighborhoods located close by. What is seen by<br />
the average taxpayer is therefore not a set of goods and services, but a<br />
complex tax system that is impenetrable and, at the local level, even seen as<br />
simply unfair where ailing inner city schools require tax revenues collected at<br />
the state or county level from more affluent, largely white suburbs.<br />
Redistribution is one of the main targets of the Bush tax cut and its impact<br />
will be substantial. Recent data show that, even before the current tax cut was<br />
put into effect, the top 400 wealthiest taxpayers paid less taxes in 2000 than<br />
in both 1995 and in 1992. In the past nine years, the incomes of the “top<br />
400 tax payers increased 15 times the rate of the bottom 90 percent of<br />
Americans.” 2 And it is important to point out in this context that the top 1<br />
percent of income earners in America have a 26 percent share of the tax<br />
burden while their share of the Bush tax cuts is over 50 percent. 3<br />
However we may view the rhetoric of the tax cuts, what is becoming ever<br />
more apparent is a gradual destruction of the public sector and the expansion<br />
of the market to more domains of society. In this sense, the Bush tax cuts are<br />
not merely an expression of fiscal policy. They also fundamentally serve a<br />
larger project of redirecting the way that American democracy has functioned<br />
throughout the post-war era. This redirection involves a wholesale<br />
transformation in the way that government can act to soften the harsh<br />
impacts of the capitalist economy whether it is in the form of economic<br />
inequality or environmental degradation.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
Tax Reform and Political Opportunism: Bush in Context<br />
THE TREND TOWARD TAX REFORM in the 1980s was, it should be admitted,<br />
the result of many legitimate economic pressures. The problem was not in<br />
the changing economics of global capitalism but in the way the politics of the<br />
right in America—as well as other nations—used this economic pressure for<br />
its own ideological ends. This can be explained in the flowing way. During<br />
the post-war years, there was a general consensus among policy makers that<br />
taxes should be progressive and used as tools for economic management.<br />
Throughout the 1950s and 1960s, this Keynesian logic made possible<br />
spending on large social programs and the investment in infrastructure.<br />
Business and the wealthy paid large marginal tax rates as opposed to the poor,<br />
working, and middle classes. This form of redistribution that allowed<br />
working people and even entire regions of the country to migrate to<br />
improved living conditions and to enjoy improved social services and public<br />
goods.<br />
Arguments were often made about the degree to which these taxes were<br />
indeed progressive. Political élites—more often than not representatives of<br />
business interests—made the argument time and again that a reduction of<br />
taxes would mean an increase in economic growth and productivity (a rise in<br />
GDP). However, such political arguments had very little support. First, there<br />
was the problem of politics. Americans overwhelmingly supported progressive<br />
taxation since the majority of them benefited from it directly. But next, the<br />
few studies that were made on the link between taxation and economic<br />
growth showed that there was no relationship at all. 4 Anti-tax political<br />
rhetoric therefore lacked, through the 1950s and 1960s and well into the<br />
1970s, any political support from the citizenry of the United States and also<br />
any empirical support from the social science establishment.<br />
This situation began to change in the late 1970s. For one thing, as American<br />
workers began to prosper they also started moving up in income tax brackets<br />
and getting hit by increasingly higher tax rates. This was part of the system’s<br />
design, and it also showed the old system was actually working. Tax revenues<br />
were supposed to grow automatically since “as the economy expanded,<br />
inflation pushed more and more individuals into higher and higher tax<br />
brackets as their nominal incomes increased.” 5 The tax system that had been<br />
devised and implemented in the 1950s and early 1960s began to lose its<br />
redistributive impact since the classes that, in the past, had benefited from<br />
the redistribution of wealth were now being taxed at ever higher rates and the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
benefits were no longer as clear as they once were. The result was a sharp<br />
increase in political pressure toward tax reform which, with the election of<br />
Ronald Reagan in 1980, led to a wholesale redirection of American<br />
government and its tax policies from the weakening of government agencies<br />
such as Housing and Urban Development (HUD) to an expanded federal<br />
deficit and the start of a widening gap in income and wealth that continues<br />
to grow today.<br />
The economic facts were merely an entrée for neoconservatives to argue their<br />
case for the minimal state and the reduction of taxes on corporations and the<br />
wealthy. Tax reform was necessary, but not the sort of draconian cuts in<br />
public services and institutions that served the working poor that were<br />
inevitably enacted. Instead of a reworking of increasingly complex tax codes<br />
and regulations, tax cuts were initiated that helped exacerbate inequalities<br />
that were growing from the impacts of a post-industrial economy. What the<br />
conservatives of the “Reagan Revolution” did was to focus opportunistically<br />
on public dissatisfaction about growing tax burdens created by a system that<br />
was in need of reform and use this public sentiment to trample the welfare<br />
state.<br />
On the whole, the statistical data is clear for anyone who has any casual<br />
acquaintance with the econometric studies and economic data: since 1980,<br />
there is a statistically significant relationship between the level of taxation and<br />
economic growth: as taxes increased, economic performance lessened in terms<br />
of GDP growth. This situation changed from the 1950s, 1960s and 1970s<br />
because there was a reconfiguration of global capitalism. From the 1980s<br />
onward, there was an increased global mobility of capital and the result was<br />
that corporations were able to move spatially to avoid costs. Taxes were<br />
among these costs. By 1990, this was a general theory of business planning<br />
with <strong>Michael</strong> Porter’s book, The Competitive Advantage of Nations, serving as<br />
one of the central texts coaching businesses in how to avoid the costs of<br />
producing in only one site, especially a site that was not “friendly” to business<br />
in terms of tax rates and regulatory limitations. Corporations were<br />
encouraged to move to places where the tax burden—as well as wages and<br />
other limitations—were less prohibitive to profits. In the United States, this<br />
meant moving many factory jobs out of the northeastern states, where labor<br />
unions were strong and businesses taxes were higher at the state and local<br />
levels, to the south or to other countries (i.e., Mexico).<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
As the global economy began to change, the political economy of American<br />
taxation began to change as well. But this is where the crucial issue arises:<br />
even though there clearly were economic pressures brought on by this<br />
restructuring and the American tax system was in need of reform to remain a<br />
viable method of redistribution, the political reality was something quite<br />
different. The populist cry for tax reform was translated by the Reagan<br />
administration into a project of restructuring the state—a project which is<br />
still ongoing—where the role of the state in providing services was bypassed<br />
in favor of privatization and the redistributive functioning of taxation was<br />
rolled back. Legitimate needs for tax reform were therefore twisted by<br />
conservatives in an attempt to reorganize government and transform<br />
American democracy.<br />
Redefining and Restructuring American Democracy<br />
In 1843, the German economist Wilhelm Roscher wrote that political<br />
economy is not merely the “art of acquiring wealth; it is a political science<br />
based on evaluating and governing people.” 6 Economics is therefore a field<br />
that is fundamentally concerned with the very idea of the public good, it is<br />
far from being a value-free science. This is something that has been lost in<br />
recent debates on the politics of the Bush tax cut. The assumption—or even<br />
the outright belief—remains that there are legitimate economic reasons that<br />
can justify the various tax cuts which, and this is usually openly admitted,<br />
explicitly favor the wealthy. Inequalities that are generated from the tax cuts<br />
are considered “justifiable” first on supposedly economic grounds (i.e.,<br />
promoting growth and employment) and, at times, on ethical grounds, in the<br />
sense that everyone deserves to keep whatever they “earn.” But neither of<br />
these contentions actually make sense. No empirical evidence links tax cuts<br />
on wealthier income earners and employment, nor is there any reliable<br />
evidence that supports a link between tax cuts on individual income and<br />
economic growth, even if there is evidence, as was discussed above, that<br />
corporate tax rates do affect growth rates. Economic policy is being done for<br />
political ends and the actual content and intention of this politics needs to be<br />
seen for what it is: a reconfiguration of American democracy. This<br />
reconfiguration means a retreat from the idea that the state ought to<br />
meliorate class differences, the acceptance of the idea that political democracy<br />
is somehow indifferent to economic and social inequality, and toward a<br />
situation where the market extends to almost every aspect of public life.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
It is interesting to note that the Bush administration openly admits that its<br />
tax cuts favor the wealthy. This is a marked change from even twenty years<br />
ago when the political theorist Philip Green could write that “[s]pecial<br />
advantages for economic élites, as in the United States tax code, are<br />
introduced sub rosa, never proclaimed out loud. No one defends legislation<br />
by suggesting that the better class should be rewarded more and the inferior<br />
class less.” 7 Today, there has been a shift in the political sensitivity to social<br />
inequality and class division.<br />
It is a specific political philosophy, or ideology, that essentially defines the<br />
Bush tax cuts. The Bush administration’s economic argument that the tax<br />
cuts will somehow stimulate a dragging economy and increase employment<br />
has little support in theory and no support empirically. The tax cuts are<br />
proposed as part of a stimulus package, one that will promote economic<br />
growth. But, as James K. Galbraith has recently pointed out, these cuts are<br />
not a growth policy for two crucial reasons: “They are targeted to the<br />
wealthy, and they are back-loaded so as to conceal their true long-term<br />
impact on budget deficits.” 8 The extent of the tax cuts is therefore structured<br />
so that the real effects on the budget will not show up for another ten years or<br />
so since tax cuts on the wealthy will continue to diminish tax revenues and<br />
therefore increasingly bankrupt the state. Of course, this is not obvious when<br />
one examines the tax plan since such easily perceived hardship would cause at<br />
least a small degree of backlash.<br />
It is well-known economic logic that growth could be stimulated by new and<br />
increased government spending, something that has not even been publicly<br />
debated by the Bush administration’s economic policy advisors. This is<br />
because it would put the United States back in a Keynesian policy state of<br />
mind; and this means that there would be legitimacy in refunding the state<br />
and this would give some weight to political interests that want to expand the<br />
welfare state, government programs, regulatory agencies and other things<br />
which would be antithetical to the pro-business mentality and interests of the<br />
neoconservative agenda. In other words, once the state becomes more active<br />
in the economy, there is more likelihood that that state will also be used for<br />
expanding social programs. This runs directly counter to the current trend of<br />
shrinking the state and its influence in both economy and society.<br />
There is also the question of economic growth and job creation. This issue<br />
has been at the core of the Bush administration’s arguments for the tax cuts<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
as well as a broad conservative wave of support. Heritage Foundation<br />
economist Mark Wilson claimed in a recent study that if the tax cuts were<br />
made retroactive to the beginning of 2003, 1.6 million jobs would be added<br />
to the economy by 2011 and expand economic output by another $248<br />
billion. 9 But there have been no academic economists who have been able to<br />
verify these findings in a single peer reviewed professional journal, and it is<br />
little surprise why. The rationale is classic “supply-side” economic thinking:<br />
the more money that is poured into the economy by letting people keep what<br />
they earn—so the supply-siders argue, in theory of course—the more society<br />
as a whole will benefit since people—especially the wealthy—will be more<br />
likely to invest in the economy and start new enterprises. A “free” market<br />
liberated from any type of restraint, regulation and public accountability is<br />
therefore the optimal arrangement for liberty and democracy. 10 This is the<br />
essential view that informs neoconservative political and social thought, but it<br />
is not a fact of economic science. Recall 1993 when there was an increase in<br />
the top income tax rate from 33 percent to 39.6 percent and still there was an<br />
increase in capital investment and a flourishing economy throughout the<br />
remainder of the 1990s. From the point of view of empirical evidence, the<br />
conservative argument quite simply makes no sense.<br />
It is more correct to say, then, that there is a political imperative behind this<br />
shift in economic policy, and its agenda is the fundamental transformation of<br />
American democracy as we have known it throughout the post-war period.<br />
The primary motivation is the ideological view that the state needs to be<br />
reduced, to be minimized. The conservative economist Robert Barro of<br />
Harvard University and the Hoover Institution put it most bluntly:<br />
One attraction of tax cuts and deficits is that they starve the<br />
government of revenue and thereby promote spending<br />
restraint. This worked particularly well in the 1980s. The<br />
Reagan tax reductions were a proclamation that the growth<br />
in government had to stop—and, with something of a lag,<br />
that happened from the mid-1980s through the 1990s. . . .<br />
[M]ost people’s income comes from their skill and effort<br />
(or, through inheritance, from the skill and effort of their<br />
parents). People deserve to keep most of what they have<br />
produced and earned, after sharing reasonably in the tax<br />
burden for financing a limited government. 11<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
In many ways, Barro’s comment outlines in brief the basic ideology behind<br />
the politics of the tax cuts. The starving of the state is part and parcel of a<br />
political philosophy that sees an increase in the extent to which the market—<br />
and therefore not public, but private interests—control many, if not most, of<br />
the production and supply of public goods and services (school vouchers are<br />
one example of this). But the reality of the implications of a social policy<br />
driven by low taxes is never highlighted by any of these thinkers or writers.<br />
Take California, a state that passed Proposition 13 in 1978 which says that<br />
property taxes cannot be greater than 1 percent of the actual sales price on<br />
real estate with a limited increase of 2 percent per year. Although the tax was<br />
clearly something that most homeowners supported—and still do, it still has<br />
a support rating of 60 percent in the state—the benefits flowed to<br />
corporations whose property taxes on land and buildings are under-assessed<br />
and therefore drain the state, and its municipalities, of essential tax dollars. 12<br />
California now faces a $38 billion deficit and its public services have<br />
suffered—its schools are consistently ranked in the bottom half of the nation<br />
when it comes to spending per-student.<br />
Why people accept this situation is a crucial question that needs to be asked.<br />
For one thing, there is an ideological explanation. Taxes themselves are not<br />
seen as public goods and services, but as redistributive mechanisms to those<br />
that do not deserve it—i.e., the poor—or as funding an ever-expanding state<br />
and government waste. This is, in part, the product of the rhetoric of the<br />
Reagan administration and its attack on welfare. But there has also been a<br />
general consensus in the media—one that has become almost universally<br />
accepted—that government programs are inherently inefficient and never<br />
benefit those that they intent to help. This negative view of government<br />
programs is partly due to a certain ideology that has been nurtured by<br />
conservative think tanks, writers and politicians for more than three decades.<br />
In this sense, the middle class in America sees fewer of its interests in<br />
common with the lower class, even though this is clearly not the case. 13<br />
As this divide has increased—especially as the racialization of this divide also<br />
has increased—the largely white middle class sees the social cost of promoting<br />
more equality through taxation as increasingly unfair since it sees itself as<br />
shouldering much of this burden, never mind the fact that the middle class,<br />
too, has been affected by falling incomes and will increasingly see a slide in<br />
their own quality of life and the public institutions around them. This<br />
ideological explanation translates into a political reality where the lower<br />
classes are largely disenfranchised and the middle and upper classes would<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
prefer to keep their incomes safe from taxation and have little interest in an<br />
increase in social equality and do not see the deteriorating quality of their<br />
public services as being connected with dwindling tax revenues. Either way,<br />
this cleavage between the lower and middle classes is politically debilitating<br />
since the Democratic Party sees its traditional constituency of the working<br />
poor and middle class workers with divergent political interests even though<br />
they have more in common with each other than either of them do with the<br />
wealthy. The fact is that fighting for improved public services and worker<br />
protections of all kinds are things that both the working poor and the middle<br />
class share as common interests. The problem remains articulating a political<br />
message that bridges this divide.<br />
This reorientation of American democracy puts markets and private interest<br />
over that of the public interest. Indeed, this has been the mainstay of<br />
American public life, but the new phase of this trend threatens to make it a<br />
more permanent reality. The reality of this situation can be seen most<br />
explicitly in the rise in economic inequality in the United States. The income<br />
tax was started in 1914 as a “class tax,” one that took from the wealthy and<br />
redistributed to the rest of society. This turned into a “mass tax” during the<br />
Second World War to accrue monies for the war effort. However, it is<br />
precisely the notion of class that has been allowed to drop out of the<br />
discussion. Class is at the center of the tax cut debate because, as Barro<br />
incorrectly states, it is not the case that wealthy people are the ones that<br />
“produce” and therefore “earn” what they receive in terms of income.<br />
Capitalism is an economic system that produces profits from social labor; the<br />
fact that corporate CEOs make more than 400 times the income of the<br />
workers that actually produce the products and services can hardly be<br />
justified through an argument based along the lines of earning one’s pay.<br />
This may be an extreme example, but all one needs to do is look at any<br />
corporation that develops, say, new technologies. Most, if not all, new<br />
technologies are developed in labs and research departments by Ph.D.s or<br />
other highly-skilled researchers earning middle income salaries whereas<br />
owners earn profits and income that are exponentially higher.<br />
What this discussion points to is that the very meaning of democracy in<br />
America is being transformed, perhaps transmogrified is a better term. In<br />
place of public concerns and the public interest, it is private interest that has<br />
now become paramount in social policy. Whereas the general character of the<br />
American welfare state in the post-war period implicitly recognized that<br />
political democracy and political equality are practically meaningless without<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
some degree of economic equality and that capitalism as an economic system<br />
had serious deleterious effects on society, we now see an institutional<br />
transformation where the welfare state is being rolled back to allow the<br />
market once again—as in the 19th century—to operate freely irrespective of<br />
its social costs. The peculiar caste of American liberalism has typically been<br />
seen as strongly Lockean: private property and the ability to accumulate<br />
property indefinitely and, therefore, wealth, has always been its backbone.<br />
But there have also been other aspects of liberalism: those that stood up for<br />
the unpropertied and those whose interests were not served by the free<br />
activities of those who owned private property. Indeed, the expansion of<br />
American liberalism came not—as neoconservatives have been arguing in<br />
recent years—from the ability of individuals to own property and pursue an<br />
“American dream,” but rather from labor unions and working people that<br />
pushed for democratic reforms in the economy, the state and society. 14<br />
Democracy is now being translated into a laissez-faire libertarian reality: as<br />
the organization of the entirety of society around the pivot of self-interest<br />
subject to minor legal restraints by a minimal state.<br />
Bankrupting the state is therefore a primary aim of the conservative<br />
revolution. The very core of any substantive democracy, the public sphere,<br />
has slowly eroded through the further separation between state, society and<br />
economy, a separation made initially by Locke and then intensified by<br />
revolutionary thinkers like Thomas Paine. But American democracy was not<br />
initially grounded in Lockean notions of liberalism as writers such as Louis<br />
Hartz have insisted. Rather, it was the tradition of republicanism that<br />
informed the American Revolution and the early vision of the kind of<br />
democracy and society that it would usher in. In this sense, American<br />
democracy was initially concerned with the preservation of the public good<br />
through political institutions that were publicly accountable; it was not selfinterest<br />
and the accumulation of private property that initially informed<br />
broad sections of the American citizenry. But throughout American political<br />
history, there has been a real tension between this tradition of republicanism<br />
and its emphasis on the public good and Lockean liberalism that places<br />
emphasis on private property and a liberal political order insisting on the<br />
separation the political and economic spheres. Thinkers like William Graham<br />
Sumner in the 19th century and, more recently, Milton Friedman, have<br />
interpreted American democracy through the lens of individual liberty and,<br />
therefore, as economic and political liberalism, a position grounded in the<br />
individual and not in a conception of the public.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
Progressive alternatives to the tax cuts need to be articulated. A tax system<br />
that is as indecipherable and impenetrable as that in the United States<br />
requires serious reform. However, this does not mean eliminating tax<br />
revenues through tax cuts. Taxes on wealth would be much more effective<br />
than taxes on income since inequality has risen most in terms of wealth and<br />
not in terms of income. 15 In this way, the place where social inequality is<br />
most intense—in the unequal distribution of wealth—would be the place<br />
where redistribution would be concentrated. Wealth inequality between<br />
households means a disparity in the ability to buy a home, is more “likely to<br />
be better able to provide for its children’s educational and health needs, live<br />
in a neighborhood characterized by more amenities and lower levels of crime,<br />
have greater resources that can be called upon in times of economic hardship,<br />
and have more influence in political life.” 16<br />
But even more, the central problem—and one that would no doubt capture<br />
the attention of much of the electorate—would be to advocate job growth<br />
through government stimulus. What the Democrats in Washington should<br />
be pushing for in place of simply smaller tax cuts is an expansion in<br />
government programs that provide both public services and employment.<br />
Education, health care as well as transportation infrastructure are specific<br />
examples. Aside from being excellent opportunities for the state to create<br />
useful and dearly needed public services, they would also create well-paying<br />
jobs for large segments of the population. These are programs that have<br />
actually worked in the past and today require more serious attention in part<br />
because they are in stark opposition to the supply-side policies that the Bush<br />
administration has been pushing. Indeed, the empirical evidence for job<br />
growth resulting from increased consumer spending is extremely weak<br />
compared to that of state and federal programs. 17<br />
A responsible left program needs to counter the ideology that currently<br />
hampers economic policy and move toward policies that will capture the<br />
interests of working people and connect their concerns with broader public<br />
programs at the state and federal level. This has not happened for a variety of<br />
reasons, one of which can be located in the general ideological view of the<br />
contemporary left and its attitude toward the state. In many ways, this is a<br />
product of the 1960s and the New Left which was overtly hostile toward the<br />
state. From anarchist-inspired movements to the Arendtians and the<br />
emphasis on communitarianism over what was generally seen as the<br />
coerciveness of the state—all of which were quite respectable positions on the<br />
left in the 1960s—the New Left promulgated a general political view that<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
was in opposition to the state, not merely in practice, but in theory as well. 18<br />
The New Left’s attack on the state left liberal Democrats with few allies when<br />
conservatives took power in 1980 with their own anti-state agenda. The state<br />
programs of the Roosevelt and Johnson administrations seem utopian now in<br />
the present context and the left has itself to blame in part for the lack of<br />
political and ideological support for the state and it has no practical<br />
institutional alternatives to the neoconservative vision that is emerging as<br />
present reality.<br />
Even more, there was also—beginning in the early 1970s—an effort by big<br />
business to clamp down on labor unions and also begin a campaign of<br />
political activism themselves to help stem the tide of anti-business sentiment<br />
whipped up during the 1960s. This is where institutions such as the<br />
American Enterprise Institute, the Cato Institute and the Heritage<br />
Foundation got started and by the end of the decade, they had succeeded in<br />
electing a president with their own ideological perspective.<br />
As a result of these different political trends, the Bush tax cuts will be able to<br />
push further a liberalized economic order that at the same time promotes<br />
economic inequality and the concentration of power in the hands of the few<br />
at the expense of the many, whether it be through wealth, property, or media<br />
control. This agenda goes against the grain of much of Western political<br />
thought which constantly repeats the injunction against extreme inequalities<br />
in property and wealth. From Plato and Aristotle through Locke, Smith,<br />
Hegel, Tocqueville and Dewey, among so many others, gross social<br />
inequalities have been seen as a major threat to the common good and a<br />
democratic polity. More and more, the republican strain in American politics<br />
is being eroded and the move toward a democracy based on the foundation<br />
of private interest is being increasingly privileged. Such a reconfigured<br />
democracy will see the roll back of the institutions and policies that have<br />
helped those disadvantaged by the economy; it will increase economic<br />
inequalities as well as inequalities in quality of life; and, in the end, it will<br />
affect the way that political power is distributed in the United States. The<br />
Bush tax cuts are therefore more complex and even more dangerous than<br />
initially meets the eye, and it is the very structure of American democratic<br />
culture and governance that hangs in the balance.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
Notes<br />
1 Grover Norquist on NOW in conversation with Bill Moyers, transcript at:<br />
http://www.pbs.org/now/printable/transcript_norquist_print.html. It must<br />
be said that there is also a bit of hysteria mixed in with this rhetoric. Norquist<br />
again: “Guys with guns will show up if you don’t pay your taxes and take<br />
that money from you. And I think that we want in order to have a free<br />
society to have as little as possible done coercively.” (Ibid.)<br />
2 David Cay Johnston, “Very Richest’s Share of Income Grew Even Bigger,<br />
Data Show,” The New York Times, June 26, 2003.<br />
3 See Laura D’Andrea Tyson, “Tax Cuts for the Rich Are Even More Wrong<br />
Today,” Business Week Online at:<br />
http://www.businessweek.com/magazine/content/02_27/b3790053.htm.<br />
4 See Claudio Katz, Vincent Mahler and <strong>Michael</strong> Franz, “The Impact of<br />
Growth and Distribution in Capitalist Countries: A Cross National Study,”<br />
American Political Science Review, vol. 77, no. 4, 1983.<br />
5 Sven Steimo, “Why Tax Reform? Understanding Tax Reform in its Political<br />
and Economic Context,”<br />
http://stripe.colorado.edu/%7Esteinmo/reform.html.<br />
6 Grundrisse zu Vorlesungen über die Staatswirtschaft quoted in George E.<br />
McCarthy, Classical Horizons: The Origins of Sociology in Ancient Greece<br />
(Albany: SUNY Press, 2003).<br />
7 The Pursuit of Inequality, p. 3 (New York: Pantheon Books, 1981).<br />
8 “Socking It to the States,” p. 12 The Nation, June 9, 2003.<br />
9 See David Francis, “Bush Tax Cuts Widen US Income Gap,” The Christian<br />
Science Monitor and Common Dreams at:<br />
www.commondreams.org/headlines01/0523-02.htm.<br />
10 Of course, there really is no such thing as a truly free market since there is<br />
always some form of corporate welfare or tariffs that benefit corporations.<br />
The key issue that should be emphasized is that any regulation that<br />
potentially helps working people is attacked whereas those regulatory bodies<br />
and policies that help capital are promoted or maintained.<br />
11 “There’s A Lot to Like About Bush’s Tax Plan,” p. 28, Business Week,<br />
February 24, 2003.<br />
12 See Mark Baldassare, “How the West Is Taxed,” Op-Ed Section The New<br />
York Times, June 27, 2003.<br />
13 See William Julius Wilson, The Bridge Over the Racial Divide: Rising<br />
Inequality and Coalition Politics (Berkeley: University of California Press,<br />
1999).<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />
14 For an excellent statement of this position, see Karen Orren, Belated<br />
Feudalism (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991).<br />
15 See Edward N. Wolff, Top Heavy: The Increasing Inequality of Wealth in<br />
America and What Can Be Done About It (New York: The New Press, 2002).<br />
16 Edward N. Wolff, “Racial Wealth Disparities,” p. 7 Jerome Levy Institute of<br />
Economics Public Policy Brief, no. 66, 2001.<br />
17 See Jeff Madrick “Economic Scene,” The New York Times, July 10, 2003.<br />
18 Sadly, this is still a thriving view among leftist thinkers. See the recent<br />
“Rosa Luxemburg Debate” concerning the state in New Politics, vol. VIII,<br />
2002 no. 4; vol. IX, 2002, no. 1 and no. 2.<br />
<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong> is the founder and editor of <strong>Logos</strong> and teaches Political<br />
Science at Hunter College, CUNY. His new book, Islam and the West: Critical<br />
Perspectives on Modernity, has just been released from Rowman and Littlefield<br />
Press.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
L<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
American Landscape: Lies, Fears, and the<br />
Distortion of Democracy<br />
by<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
ying has always been part of politics. Traditionally, however, the lie was<br />
seen as a necessary evil that those in power should keep from their<br />
subjects. Even totalitarians tried to hide the brutal truths on which their<br />
regimes rested. This disparity gave critics and reformers their sense of<br />
purpose: to illuminate for citizens the difference between the way the world<br />
appeared and the way it actually functioned. In the aftermath of the Iraqi<br />
War, however, that sense of purpose has become imperiled along with the<br />
trust necessary for maintaining a democratic discourse. The Bush<br />
administration has boldly proclaimed the legitimacy of the lie, the irrelevance<br />
of trust, while the mainstream media has essentially looked the other way.<br />
Not since the days of Senator Joseph McCarthy has such purposeful<br />
misrepresentation, such blatant lying, permeated the political culture of the<br />
United States. It has now become clear to all except the most stubborn that<br />
the justification for war against Iraq was not simply based on “mistaken”<br />
interpretations, or “false data,” but on sheer mendacity. Current discussions<br />
among politicians and investigators focus almost exclusively on the false<br />
assertion made in sixteen words of a presidential speech that Saddam sought<br />
to buy uranium for his weapons of mass destruction in Africa. The forest has<br />
already been lost for the trees. It has all become a matter of faulty intelligence<br />
by subordinates rather than purposeful lying by those in authority. CIA<br />
officials have, however, openly stated that they were pressured to make their<br />
research results support governmental policy. Secretary of State Colin Powell<br />
has still not substantiated claims concerning the existence of weapons of mass<br />
destruction that he made in his famous speech to the United Nations. Other<br />
important members of the Bush inner circle have openly admitted that that<br />
the threat posed by Iraq was grossly exaggerated even though emphasizing it<br />
served to build a consensus for war. They have nonchalantly verified what<br />
critics have always known: that American policy was propelled by thoughts of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
an Iraqi nation “swimming in oil,” control over four rivers in an arid region,<br />
throwing the fear of the western God into Teheran and Damascus, and<br />
establishing an alternative military presence to what once existed in Saudi<br />
Arabia. The Bush administration has chastised none of them and criticisms<br />
by politicians stemming from the Democratic Party have been tempered to<br />
the point of insignificance. “Leaders” of the so-called opposition party<br />
obviously fear being branded disloyal.<br />
As they quake in their boots and wring their hands, however, issues<br />
concerning the broader justification of the war have disappeared entirely<br />
from the widely read right-wing tabloids like The New York Post and, at best,<br />
retreated to the middle pages of more credible newspapers. Enough elected<br />
politicians in both parties, scurrying for cover, now routinely make sure to<br />
note that their support for the war did not rest on the existence of weapons of<br />
mass destruction in Iraq. Rarely mentioned is that the lack of such weapons,<br />
combined with the inability to find proof of links between Saddam Hussein<br />
and Al Qaeda, invalidates the claim that Iraq actually posed a national<br />
security threat to the United States. Everyone in the political establishment<br />
now points to humanitarian motives. For the most part, however, such<br />
concerns were not upper-most in their minds then and there is little reason to<br />
believe that they believed them decisive for the public opinion of the<br />
American public: human rights indeed became championed by self-styled<br />
“realists” like Paul Wolfowitz and Henry Kissinger—whose reputations were<br />
previously based on denying them—only when claims concerning the<br />
imperiled national interests of the United States were revealed as vacuous.<br />
President Bush and members of his cabinet may now insist that the weapons<br />
will ultimately be found, with luck perhaps just before the next election, and<br />
the links to Al Qaeda will soon be unveiled. But this is already to admit that<br />
the evidence did not exist when the propaganda machine began to roll out its<br />
arguments for war. The administration had untold intellectual resources from<br />
which to learn that the United States would not be welcomed as the liberator<br />
of Iraq and that serious problems would plague the post-war reconstruction.<br />
But the administration wasn’t interested: it was content to forward its<br />
position and then find information to back it up. This indeed begs two<br />
obvious questions that are still hardly ever asked by the mainstream media:<br />
Would the American public have supported a war against Iraq under those<br />
circumstances and, perhaps more importantly, did this self-induced ignorance<br />
about conditions in Iraq help produce the current morass in which billions of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
dollars have been wasted and, seemingly every day, another few young<br />
American soldiers are being injured or killed?<br />
Millions of dollars were wasted by a special prosecutor on investigating false<br />
allegations of financial impropriety by Bill and Hillary Clinton.<br />
Impeachment proceedings were begun following the revelations of an affair<br />
between the then president and an intern. The media was up in arms and its<br />
champions still pat themselves on the back for their role in bringing about<br />
the Watergate hearings. When it comes to the chorus of untruth perpetrated<br />
over Iraq, which brought a nation into war with the resulting loss of lives and<br />
resources, it seems the public interest is best served by “bi-partisan”<br />
committees and a submissive press. Just as the Republican Party has been<br />
flagrant in its refusal to rationally justify its war of “liberation,” which is<br />
leaving an increasingly sour taste in the mouths of occupiers and occupied<br />
alike, the centrist Democratic Leadership Council made famous by Bill<br />
Clinton is now warning the public that—with the recent surge in the polls of<br />
Governor Howard Dean—its party is on the verge of being taken over by a<br />
“far left” intent upon opposing tax cuts, introducing “costly” social programs,<br />
and criticizing the foreign policy of the Bush administration.<br />
Leading members of the DLC poignantly ask whether the Democrats wish<br />
“to vent or govern” and when questioned whether the current disarray in<br />
which the party finds itself was a product of Republican success or<br />
Democratic blunders, Senator Evan Bayh of Indiana, chairman of the<br />
organization, responded that it was a matter of “assisted suicide.” Forgotten<br />
was the election of November 2002 in which, by every serious account, it was<br />
the inability of the Democratic Party to offer any meaningful alternative to<br />
the policy of President Bush that led to the most disastrous non-presidential<br />
year losses in American history. It doesn’t seem to matter that the “bipartisan”<br />
candidates like Joseph Lieberman, who refuse to offer a coherent<br />
alternative on domestic and foreign policy issues, are not catching on with<br />
the American public. It also doesn’t seem to matter that the proposed tax cuts<br />
work against the interests of the party’s own constituency, that social welfare<br />
programs would cost a fraction of the billion dollars a month spent in Iraq,<br />
and that the current foreign policy is undermining respect for the United<br />
States throughout the world. Ignored is the way in which the Democratic<br />
Party—the party of FDR, Bobby Kennedy, and Paul Wellstone—has become<br />
a joke on the mid-night talk shows. And, all the while, the “liberal” media<br />
nods its head and counsels prudence. Senator Bayh has no clue: as it now<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
stands, the Democratic Party can neither “vent” nor “govern.” Democrats<br />
should worry about their image—especially since they don’t have one.<br />
The United States is ever more surely appearing less like a functioning<br />
democracy in which ideologically distinct parties and groups debate the issues<br />
of the day than a one-party state ruled by shifting administrative factions.<br />
Free speech exists, but to have a formal right and to make substantive use of<br />
it is a very different matter. Consensus and bi-partisanship are becoming<br />
increasingly paranoid preoccupations of the media whose range of debate is<br />
becoming narrowed to that between humpty and dumpty. Noam Chomsky<br />
may not be everyone’s taste, but his little collection of interviews 9-11 (New<br />
York: Seven Stories Press) was the best-selling work on that terrible event:<br />
when was the last time you saw him interviewed on mainstream media? It is<br />
the same with Barbara Ehrenreich, Frances Fox Piven, and any number of<br />
other radical or progressive public figures. Every now and then, of course,<br />
Cornel West may pop up for an interview on MSNBC, there are still a few<br />
critical editorialists like Paul Krugman in The New York Times and Robert<br />
Scheer in The Los Angeles Times, and Sean Penn can still pay for a full page<br />
advertisement to express his critical views on the war. Nevertheless, their<br />
voices are being drowned out by the right-wing pundits that dominate what<br />
conservatives—ever ready to view themselves as the victim of the system they<br />
control—castigate as the “liberal” media.<br />
The situation brings to mind the vision of a society dominated by what<br />
Herbert Marcuse once termed “repressive tolerance”: a world in which<br />
establishmentarians can point to the rare moment of radical criticism to<br />
better enjoy the reign of an overwhelming conformity. The evidence is<br />
everywhere: CNN is only a minor player when compared with the combined<br />
power of television news shows with huge audiences hosted by megacelebrities—still<br />
relatively unknown in Europe—like Rush Limbaugh, Bill<br />
O’Reilly, and Pat Robertson. Belief in the reactionary character of the<br />
American public has generated a self-fulfilling prophecy: the public gets the<br />
shows it wants that, in turn, only strengthen the original prejudices. Edward<br />
R. Murrow, so courageous in his resistance to the hysteria of the 1950s, may<br />
often be invoked by the “fourth estate,” but that invocation is merely<br />
symbolic.<br />
Hardly a word is said any longer about the skepticism of millions who<br />
participated in the mass demonstrations that rocked the United States or how<br />
the mainstream media criticism of Tony Blair has transformed the English<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
political landscape. One criterion for judging democracy is the plurality of<br />
views presented to the public. That is because the number of views expressed<br />
usually reflects the number of political choices from which the public can<br />
choose. It is striking to reflect upon the range of perspectives expressed<br />
during the era of Progressivism, the New Deal, and the 1960s. By the same<br />
token, however, the attempt to constrict civil liberties in moments of crisis<br />
has been a fundamental trend of American history. Thus, in the current<br />
context, it is chilling to consider the narrowing of debate over the legitimacy<br />
of a terrible war to sixteen words made in a presidential speech, an<br />
increasingly corrupt evaluation of policy options, and a growing inability of<br />
the American public to grasp the distrust its present government inspires<br />
elsewhere.<br />
A current Pew Poll of more than forty-four countries, directed by former<br />
Secretary of State Madeline Albright, shows that distrust of the United States<br />
has grown in an exceptionally dramatic fashion in each of them. This<br />
includes sensitive nations like Pakistan, Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and Indonesia<br />
where unfavorable ratings of the United States have gone from 36% in the<br />
summer of 2002 to 83% in May of 2003. The “streets” of Europe and, more<br />
importantly, the Arab world have been lost. Perhaps they will be regained at a<br />
future time. But the numbers in this poll express anger at a basic reality.<br />
With its new strategy of the “pre-emptive strike” buttressed by a $400 billion<br />
defense budget, bigger than that of the next eighteen nations put together,<br />
the United States has rendered illusory the idea of a “multi-polar world.” It<br />
has become the hegemon amid a world of subaltern states and it has no need<br />
to listen or debate. The difference between truth and falsehood no longer<br />
matter. There remains only the fact of victory, the fall of Saddam Hussein,<br />
and the bloated self-justifications attendant upon what Senator J. William<br />
Fulbright, the great critic of the Vietnam War, termed “the arrogance of<br />
power.”<br />
Americans have traditionally tended to rally around the president in times of<br />
war. But this war, according to the president, has no end in sight. A new<br />
department of “homeland security” is being contemplated and the civil<br />
liberties of citizens are imperiled. Justification is supplied by manipulative<br />
and self-serving “national security alerts” in which the designation of danger<br />
shifts from yellow to orange to red and then back again without the least<br />
evidence being presented regarding why a certain color was chosen and why<br />
it was changed. The bully pulpit of the president, as Theodore Roosevelt<br />
called it, can go a long way in defining the style of national discourse and a<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />
sense of what is acceptable to its citizenry. This is where leadership asserts<br />
itself. Nevertheless, precisely on this question of leadership for which<br />
President Bush has received such lavish praise, he is weakest.<br />
Beyond all social policy concerns, or disagreements over any particular issue<br />
of foreign policy, this president is presiding over a newly emerging culture in<br />
which truth is subordinate to power, reason is the preserve of academics,<br />
paranoia is hyped, and know-nothing nationalism is celebrated. No longer is<br />
the constructive criticism of genuine democratic allies taken seriously: better<br />
to rely on a corrupt “coalition of the willing” whose regimes have been<br />
bribed, whose economies have been threatened, and whose soldiers have been<br />
exempt from fighting this unending war on terror. There is little critical selfreflection<br />
and not the hint of an apology for its conduct in the weeks before<br />
the war broke out. It is dangerous to underestimate the moral high ground<br />
that has been squandered since 9/11. The question for other nations is this:<br />
how to trust the liar whose arrogance is such that he finds it unnecessary to<br />
conceal the lie?<br />
Democracy remains elusive in Iraq, and Afghanistan is languishing in misery<br />
while the creation of new threats to the national security of the United States<br />
is being undertaken right now. Iran trembles. Syria, too. And there is always<br />
Cuba or North Korea. The enemy can change in the blink of an eye. The<br />
point about arbitrary power is, indeed, that it is arbitrary. What happens<br />
once the next lie is told and the next gamble is made? It is perhaps useful to<br />
think back to other powerful nations whose leaders liked to lie and loved to<br />
gamble—and who won and won and won again until finally they believed<br />
their own lies and gambled once too often.<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong> is Professor (II) of Political Science, German Studies and<br />
Comparative Literature at Rutgers University. A new edition of his book A<br />
Rumor About the Jews is forthcoming from Oxford University Press.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
T<br />
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
Wither Independence?<br />
Iraq in Perspective: From Despotism to Occupation<br />
by<br />
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
I<br />
here has been nearly unanimous consensus among Iraqis that a new age<br />
of possible progress and prosperity has dawned upon their battered and<br />
war-fatigued country with the downfall of Saddam Hussein on April 9 th .<br />
However, much had tainted this rosy image, and much more could still mar<br />
the outcome. A principal factor has been the highly incompetent and<br />
nonchalant manner in which the U.S.-U.K. occupying forces have conducted<br />
themselves: one wonders if this is a result of sheer imperial arrogance, or<br />
ignorance of the region, or a combination of both. None of the above reasons<br />
is excusable in any way, of course. When a disproportionate U.S. force<br />
decimated Saddam Hussein’s two infamous sons, Uday and Qusay, and their<br />
few companions and then showed their battered images to the world, two<br />
messages may be read therefrom. First, the U.S. will absolutely contravene<br />
every mode of rational, moral, ethical and reasonable behavior to make their<br />
point and achieve success (in their own assessment). Why did they not arrest<br />
these two criminals and have them justly tried in Iraqi courts? Second, U.S.<br />
policy planners have an inveterate attachment to change through force. The<br />
lessons from the 20 th century are aplenty (as the Hiroshima anniversary,<br />
amongst others, adequately reminds us), and the difference now is of volume<br />
and rate rather than quality.<br />
Those of us who vehemently opposed the launch of an immoral, unjust and<br />
illegal war have to seriously address now the occupation: not in a romantic,<br />
knee-jerk oppositional fashion—which has become commonplace among<br />
western as well as Arab oppositionists to U.S. imperialist plans—but in a<br />
calculated manner that puts the interests of the Iraqi people<br />
uncompromisingly at the forefront. Thus, what are the facts on the ground,<br />
and what may be done? In what follows, I am more interested in raising<br />
questions than providing simple, speculative answers. What deeply angers<br />
and pains me are the cold as well as condescending views offered by Arabs or<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
Americans, alike, when it comes to dealing with Iraq. To these two groups,<br />
governments and populace, Iraq seems to be a possession, and each has an<br />
opinion on what to do with it. Very little attention is given to the how to<br />
achieve results, which leads me, and a few others, to believe that none is really<br />
interested in the well-being of Iraqis.<br />
II<br />
The U.S. has waged the war against Iraq in spite of unprecedented<br />
worldwide public pressure against it. The pretexts for the war, Saddam<br />
Hussein’s possession of Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD) and his<br />
alleged link to al-Qaeda, have been in dispute from the very beginning. Four<br />
months after the war and neither a trace of WMD exists, nor a hint of a link<br />
to al-Qaeda terrorists, rather an unraveling of a series of apocryphal stories<br />
penned by elected and unelected officials in the U.S. and U.K. governments<br />
with the sole purpose of manipulating public opinion prior to waging war.<br />
Now the sad fact is that such despicable tactics—and the list could be long—<br />
have placed the fallen despot, Saddam Hussein, and his regime in a rather<br />
romantic-heroic position among many a person within the Arab world, the<br />
third world and elsewhere. Rather than containing terrorist groups and<br />
cutting their lifelines, U.S. actions have given life to a litany of fragmented,<br />
but ruthless, reactionary groups intent on inflicting damage on all symbols of<br />
modernity—and certainly not limited to the U.S. and its interests.<br />
To this day, many cannot fathom the horrific and criminal nature of the<br />
deposed Iraqi regime; and U.S. tactics in Iraq have allowed people to<br />
compare to and contrast with a fictitious version of Saddam Hussein’s reign.<br />
Every visitor to Iraq speaks of war-torn cities, devastation, dilapidated services<br />
and war- and sanctions-fatigued populace, on the one hand, and the existence<br />
of monstrous, grand palaces and edifices, on the other: All being the direct<br />
outcome of 30+ years of authoritarian rule and 12 years of the most<br />
suffocating (U.S.-U.K. instigated and propelled) economic sanctions ever<br />
imposed. But Iraqis returning for the first time after decades of exile have<br />
observed one thing of significant importance in the midst of the rubble:<br />
people feel free and hopeful. There is a satisfying, inner happiness one feels<br />
when free that can only be understood if one’s freedom has been curtailed: no<br />
explanation, lengthy or terse, would do justice. This is what precisely gives<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
one hope for a better tomorrow. Alas, both are slowly being nibbled at, and<br />
the prospects are unclear.<br />
Four months after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s hierarchical structure of<br />
governance, basic municipal and civic services are at an appallingly low level.<br />
The work force has no work and only portion of it has started receiving<br />
salaries, some of which were given in useless currency that further aggravated<br />
an already drained populace. 1 Security is deteriorating mainly in Baghdad and<br />
environs, while most other cities function much better. Further, the rumor<br />
mill is grinding absolutely anything imaginable, which only contributes to<br />
increasing the level of uncertainty in the country. The Coalition Provisional<br />
Authority (CPA) promulgated actions that could only worsen a very<br />
unsettled situation, namely: dissolving the Army and affiliated organizations,<br />
as well as the Ministry of Information, thus rendering more than 250,000<br />
without recourse to any source of livelihood. Furthermore, the so-called<br />
process of de-Baathification is purely ideological in nature—principally<br />
fueled by the hawks in the U.S. Administration and their Iraqi underlings,<br />
most notably Ahmed Chalabi, Kanan Makiya and Co.<br />
In a country where membership to the Baath party became the only means<br />
for advancement for many, this tactic is bound to engulf the country in a<br />
process of vilification and counter-vilification based on personal, rather than<br />
objective, accounts. What would be more a appropriate and just recourse is<br />
to judiciously investigate the role of senior Baath functionaries: trying before<br />
the law all those guilty of crimes against the people, and pardoning those<br />
whose hands were untainted. A national heeling and reconciliation process is<br />
essential if the tragedies and horrors of the past 30 years are to be<br />
constructively addressed, and avoid institutionalizing recrimination and guilt<br />
by association. The latter is likely to take the country down a dangerous<br />
spiral, which accentuates antiquated tribal rule—that Saddam Hussein<br />
himself tried to resuscitate in the latter part of the nineties to further buttress<br />
his reign. Iraq’s political parties must resist this and instead press for just trials<br />
and a process of reconciliation. Interestingly, the majority of Iraqis seems to<br />
favor this approach as evinced by personal and televised accounts (albeit not<br />
polled scientifically), thus presenting yet another hopeful scenario for Iraq<br />
and its people if left alone.<br />
Events indicate that the U.S. invading-cum-occupying forces, while<br />
possessing formidable fire power, have seemingly less than formidable<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
planning and analytical powers. Most echelons of the decision-making<br />
process within the U.S. government had apparently been surprised by the run<br />
of events. More surprisingly, no contingency plans had been prepared for the<br />
(speedy) fall of Saddam Hussein’s government and the ensuing dissolution of<br />
ministries, state organizations, the police, etc. What would a rational person<br />
expect would happen if a highly centralized structure of governance<br />
dependent on a ruthless social policy grounded in chauvinistic and sectarian<br />
politics suddenly collapsed? Why, then, have U.S. planners and their research<br />
centers and institutes been unable to anticipate at least a general framework<br />
for dealing with events?<br />
The sanctions-fatigued, repressed Iraqis with hardly adequate access to basic<br />
food requirements, never mind super-dooper search engines, computing<br />
power, etc., could—and would—have done much better than the<br />
functionaries of the CPA. It is also worthy of note that this just-do-and-waitto-see-what-happens<br />
is essentially the same obscurantism governing<br />
doctrinaire religious teachings (of whatever color): a complete and utter<br />
absence of critical thought. This behavior fundamentally stems from what the<br />
U.S. feels itself to be: the unparalleled imperial power of our age. Thus,<br />
ideology is fundamentally and intrinsically at the core of all that is<br />
happening, and the media have performed a compelling job of disinforming<br />
the U.S. populace and effectively contributing to a brainwashing campaign at<br />
an astounding rate. A pressing question presents itself: Will the U.S. populace<br />
seek to change this through ballot boxes in 2004? Will they come to really<br />
understand that they would not be hated in the world if they actually<br />
thought of the rest of the world on an equal footing and genuinely divorced<br />
themselves from condescending attitudes that are so prevalent in almost every<br />
segment of class, profession, ethnic and religious background?<br />
III<br />
IRAQ IS BEING CONSTANTLY PORTRAYED AS A FRAGILE formation of ethnoreligious<br />
groups, essentially violent and vying for power. Is there a country on<br />
this planet that is not an amalgamation of ethno-religious groups? Even Israel<br />
as a Jewish State comprises various ethnicities, and hence is heterogeneous.<br />
Modern Iraq has been a staunchly secular country where the separation of<br />
religion from the state has been a fact of life—respected and adopted by all,<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
and certainly by its Shiite and Sunni religious establishments. While not a<br />
phenomenon at the popular level, ethno-sectarian chauvinism has been<br />
institutionalized by the state since its inception: the progeny of the British<br />
concocted Cox-al-Naqeeb plan laying down the foundation for the pyramidal<br />
power structure in the nascent government of Iraq in 1921. To ensure<br />
reliance on foreign forces, state power was entrusted to a minority elite, with<br />
a clear segregation of the largesse among the vying groups: Officers of the<br />
erstwhile Ottoman Army, Sunni landowners and religious notables, and a<br />
handful of Shiite landowners and religious notables and Jewish and Christian<br />
businessmen. 2 The association was entrenched in the belonging to a group,<br />
ethnic, religious or sectarian, rather than to the country Iraq. It may be moot<br />
to question whether that was not a reflection of the lack of a national<br />
identity; however, history indicates that the inhabitants of Iraq had strongly<br />
identified themselves with the land of Mesopotamia, and their association has<br />
since been with it rather than strictly speaking the tribe, or religion or sect.<br />
1958, marking the overthrow of the monarchy and the establishment of the<br />
first republic, ushered in a new period where Iraqis identified themselves as<br />
citizens and not according to tribal, religious or sectarian divides. The<br />
modern political formations, Communist or Pan-Arab—principally the<br />
Baath party, have been clearly secular and encompassed all sectors of society<br />
along ideological rather than ethno-sectarian divisions. The Baath party<br />
slowly degenerated since Saddam Hussein became the “strong man” in the<br />
early seventies, and in the summer of 1979 he consummated his power by<br />
annihilating the leftist wing within the party (led by Abdel Khaleq al-<br />
Samarai, who was summarily purged with more than 50 of his comrades,<br />
most of whom were executed by Saddam and his underlings). During the<br />
1980s Saddam Hussein embarked on entrenching a family-based rule, and<br />
the remnants of the party had become a façade to one of the darkest periods<br />
of Iraq’s history. In the 1990s, with the help of the sanctions, the government<br />
had further degenerated into a brutal mafia-style repression against any<br />
modicum of opposition. The inhabitants of the south, mostly Shias, paid a<br />
particularly heavy price as a result of their uprising following the 1991 Gulf<br />
War. Prior to 1991 the government had forcibly transferred Arabs from the<br />
south to the Kurdish north, especially oil-rich Kirkuk, with the objective of<br />
creating a new demographic reality. Moreover, a diligent student of the<br />
British colonizers, Saddam Hussein fervently adopted an approach favoring<br />
one or other Sunni clan for wealth and governmental positions, and<br />
continually pitted one tribe against the other. This ipso facto created a<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
situation whereby those minority tribes had come to associate their<br />
comfortable status with the regime’s existence.<br />
The inhabitants of the south, on the other hand, have long been suppressed<br />
not because of their Shia faith per se, but because that region had always been<br />
a source of resistance against central authority. The south of Iraq, one of the<br />
richest cultural hot spots anywhere, has long been characteristically secular<br />
and had been the birthplace of Iraqi communism as well as the Arab socialist<br />
movement—including the Baath party. Hence, the brutal repression and<br />
suppression inflicted on the inhabitants of the south by Saddam Hussein’s<br />
regime simply began as a measure against a people demanding freedom, then<br />
metamorphosed into a sectarian identity following the disappearance of all<br />
secular opposition within Iraq. Saddam Hussein’s well-practiced technique of<br />
punishment had been collective and decisively long term: cut off the<br />
livelihood of any group of people who dares pose a threat to his rule. Thus,<br />
the Marsh Arabs, descendants of Mesopotamia’s first dwellers, have been<br />
dealt a most severe blow to their very livelihood and existence for demanding<br />
“bread and freedom”: the marshes were drained, and fertile agricultural land<br />
was turned arid because the Tigris had purposefully been redirected away<br />
from it.<br />
It is worthwhile pointing out that while the south had been brutally<br />
suppressed, not-an-insignificant number of the security apparatus torturers<br />
did actually come from the south too—with the top security echelons coming<br />
from the family mafia and affiliated subordinates. Such is the nexus of victim<br />
and torturer under Saddam Hussein’s reign of terror: entwined to the nth<br />
degree.<br />
IV<br />
Why, then, do Arab satellite TV stations and most Arab journals<br />
maliciously propagate an image of every event in Iraq taking place along<br />
sectarian lines? Al-Jazeera, in spite of clarifications and corrections from Iraqis<br />
inside Iraq, insists on calling the pockets of local fighting as “national<br />
resistance led by the Sunnis.” In many a program where audience from<br />
Baghdad, Cairo and Beirut talk about the situation in Iraq, you here one<br />
rhetorical statement after another from Cairo and Beirut devoid of genuine<br />
sympathy for the plight of the Iraqis and any concrete plan of how the Arabs<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
wish to assist the Iraqis: Thus the strong backlash within a significant portion<br />
of Iraqis, educated or otherwise all across the country, against the manner in<br />
which Arab governments, press, intellectuals and even populace had sought<br />
to represent the situation in Iraq under Saddam Hussein’s rule and now.<br />
Iraqis feel disgusted by the hypocrisy practiced by many an Arab: prior to 9<br />
April, 2003 Iraq’s children were a mere slogan for Arabs as the murderous<br />
sanctions torn them asunder, and as years of political repression sought, but<br />
failed, to create a docile populace. Most Iraqis contend that no progress could<br />
emerge in the Arab world if internal repression persists, and no justification<br />
should be given to any form of authoritarian rule, as the history of modern<br />
Iraq has amply shown: a rich nation, and highly-educated people literally<br />
reduced to selling their belongings to rummage for food for their offspring. 3<br />
Iraq may now present a scenario for the Arabs to follow. No one in Iraq is<br />
oblivious to U.S. reasons for waging war on Iraq, but they recognized their<br />
inability to stand against the U.S. mammoth—since neither Europe nor any<br />
other state dared oppose the U.S.. The split between the dormant left inside<br />
of Iraq and their comrades outside specifically addresses this point. They<br />
both agreed that no positive change could take place in Iraq while Saddam<br />
Hussein’s regime was in power, but they differed on the mechanisms for<br />
change. Those who lived inside Iraq and were experiencing repression on a<br />
daily basis felt that only an outside power could remove the despotic regime.<br />
Then, and only then, could work begin to rebuild the country. Hardly any<br />
Iraqi welcomed the invading forces, and they all agree that the occupying<br />
forces must leave. The collapse of the central government and all its offshoots<br />
created a significant power vacuum as well as a security black hole. At the<br />
current stage, foreign presence is required to maintain peace and order. The<br />
question is how and who should do it? No army in the world is trained to<br />
maintain peace and order among civilians, thus the tragic chaotic scenarios<br />
over the past four months. All visitors to Iraq acknowledge that the young<br />
American GIs are scared witless, and therefore shoot at everything that<br />
moves. This takes us back to questions I posed at the beginning of this<br />
article: Are the U.S. planners incompetent, nonchalant or both?<br />
What is clear is that a strict timeline for a speedy withdrawal of U.S. and<br />
British forces must be put in place, and at the same time a staunch<br />
commitment must be made by the UN for international forces to replace<br />
them at once. There should be no lapse between the two as the political<br />
volatility in Iraq now is serious. Moreover, the Governing Council appointed<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
by Paul Bremer III, while not the transitory national government that was<br />
demanded by the Iraqis, is required to form a united front and work to<br />
immediately achieve two goals: restoring peace and security within the<br />
country, and restoring the functioning of municipal and governmental<br />
activities. Their efficacy will be judged if they achieve these two goals and<br />
how quickly. Once this is accomplished, an unequivocal demand for the<br />
institution of democratic elections to form a new government must be put in<br />
place through a realistic, but non-pliant timeline. Achieving success would<br />
require a unified approach by the Council in order to pressure the CPA into<br />
accepting Iraqi demands.<br />
The support that the world could give Iraqis is by placing pressure on their<br />
respective governments to demand that Iraqis receive the reigns of power,<br />
peacefully, systemically and quickly. The world has a chance to show that it<br />
cannot let the U.S. greyhound loose: it must be tamed.<br />
Notes<br />
1<br />
The 10,000 Dinar note is rumoured to be counterfeit and is thus being<br />
accepted at a much lower rate, if at all. Furthermore, prices continue to soar.<br />
2<br />
The religious establishment, as elsewhere, was split between submissive and<br />
oppositional.<br />
3<br />
The Arab League in the meeting held in early August by its foreign<br />
ministers refused to recognize the Governing Council recently formed in<br />
Iraq, and rationalized the decision on the basis that recognition would be<br />
tantamount to accepting occupation. According to the charter of the League,<br />
UN Security Council resolutions must be accepted and adhered to as well as<br />
international treaties. The UN passed Security Council resolution 1483,<br />
under U.S. pressure, that basically legitimized the occupation of Iraq and<br />
placed the country under the administrative control of the occupying forces.<br />
U.S. forces occupy parts of almost every Arab state, kingdom or sheikhdom<br />
with the exception of a few, and hence the Arab foreign ministers’ talk of not<br />
willing to recognize occupation by the U.S. is nothing but hogwash.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />
Moreover, they are in contravention of the very UNSC resolutions that they<br />
proclaim to enforce. The real motive for their action lies elsewhere. A<br />
genuine change towards democracy in Iraq would threaten all of these<br />
illegitimate governments, and thus they have been united in actively<br />
opposing any reasonable resolution to the Iraq crisis. They have not even<br />
proposed any alternative to U.S. occupation, nor outlined a “road map” for<br />
ending occupation. Moreover, Arab official media continue to portray any<br />
escalation in Iraq on religious, sectarian and ethnic bases, and hardly any<br />
voice is given to the secular voices that are widely available inside the country.<br />
It is worthy of note that the clashes and confrontations with U.S. forces in<br />
regions surrounding Baghdad, notably Faluja, have been partly fuelled by<br />
religious fundamentalists, shipped to Iraq before and after the invasion of<br />
Iraq, bent on destabilizing the country. These deadly confrontations are not<br />
supported by most Iraqis and do not represent a form of armed struggle: they<br />
are futile violence whose goal is disruption of ordinary life and serves no<br />
useful goal: only innocent civilians die as a consequence.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
N<br />
Richard A. Couto<br />
The Incidental Liberation of Iraq<br />
by<br />
Richard A. Couto<br />
o one in Iraq or the U.S. believes that the primary intention of U.S.<br />
military action in Iraq was liberation. Yet, citizens of both nations need<br />
to unite to make it happen—Iraqis as an opportunity to avoid neocolonization<br />
and achieve some form of just and democratic self-rule and the<br />
U.S. as reparations for a misguided and dangerous preemptive invasion that<br />
is likely to exacerbate Middle East violence and instability. The U.S. Left<br />
cannot afford to gloat at the blunders of the Bush administration or hope for<br />
its failure. The stakes are far too high. The Left has to call upon those<br />
Democrats who can summon the courage to chart a new path to liberation,<br />
to face up to the deceptions that have brought us to this place, and to avoid<br />
the continuing deceptions about reconstruction.<br />
Almost universally, anyone in Baghdad will give you three reasons for the<br />
U.S. invasion: Israeli security; control of Iraqi oil; and weakening the Arab<br />
world. They appear as three faces of the underlying premise of U.S. policy<br />
towards Israeli security—no two Arab nations should equal Israel in military<br />
capacity. Iraq, with its oil wealth, had built one of the world’s largest armies,<br />
had the funds to support others, and Saddam, after 1991, could no longer be<br />
trusted to stay in line with US policy towards Israel.<br />
People in the U.S., thanks to the state-supporting media, are far more<br />
divided in opinion about the reasons for the US attack on Iraq. Among a list<br />
of rationale de jour’s, we find: Iraq posed an imminent threat from weapons<br />
of mass destruction: Iraq would be an eventual nuclear threat; Saddam had<br />
ties to Al-Qaeda.<br />
As the U.S. administration’s rationales fade from credibility, into a place<br />
between “technically correct” (Rumsfeld) and not “totally outrageous”<br />
(Powell), three conclusions are clear.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
• Iraqi perceptions of U.S. intentions forge a more convincing logic<br />
that connects 9/11 to our invasion and occupation of Iraq. They<br />
coincide with the Defense Department’s neo-conservatives’ position<br />
to drain the swamp that breeds terrorism. This logic proceeds from<br />
the premise that Islamic terrorism has its base in the<br />
Israeli/Palestinian conflict. Control of Iraq oil cuts off supplies to<br />
Palestinian organizations and makes it easier to impose a U.S./Israeli<br />
peace.<br />
• There is almost universal sentiment that it is good that Saddam<br />
Hussein is gone. Dividing that sentiment are reservations about the<br />
illegal and unjustified means to that end; concerns with the U.S.<br />
intentions to impose its own regime on Iraq; and worries that the<br />
U.S. Office of Coalitional Provisional Authority [OCPA] does not<br />
have the competence or will to restore basic services—electricity and<br />
water and police protection;<br />
• and the liberation of Iraq, originally incidental to our purpose, has<br />
taken on immense importance to end the U.S. march towards endless<br />
preemptive war and to prevent an accidental empire whose chief<br />
exports are “death and violence” as the solemn ending of Woodward’s<br />
book, Bush at War, envisions. Far from draining the swamp of<br />
terrorism, these outcomes will fill and expand it.<br />
If Iraq is to reach liberation, three impediments, rooted in OCPA’s<br />
performance up to present, will have to be removed. First, some degree of<br />
normal service and security needs to be restored just to demonstrate OCPA’s<br />
competence. Second, OCPA will have the join the rest of us in a world that is<br />
gray-hued and not starkly black and white. Third, OCPA will have to end<br />
the U.S. hubris that it can liberate Iraq without the aid of the UN and its<br />
member states who failed their responsibility.<br />
Competence<br />
People compare OCPA’s performance unfavorably with Saddam’s regime’s in<br />
1991 when electrical power was restored within a month of the end of the<br />
war and despite much more damage. At best, eight hours of electrical power<br />
are available per day, rotated through the city in 2 hour blocks. This provides<br />
inadequate power for cooling Baghdad’s 115 o and for pumping clean water.<br />
Similarly, people compare the fear they had of Saddam’s secret police and the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
diffuse fear they have now. Everyone has a story of a family member or<br />
neighbor robbed in their home or assaulted in the street. Women face threats<br />
from carjacking and sexual assault never known before. In the matters of<br />
safety and public services, the general assessment is that things are far worse<br />
than ever before. In effect, OCPA has turned all of Baghdad into a U.S. inner<br />
city with the variant of occupation military forces who do not speak the<br />
residents’ language.<br />
Waleed Shamil, professor of theatre arts at the University of Baghdad, makes<br />
the point even as he qualifies the severity of these problems. He thinks back<br />
to his eight years of study and teaching and assesses Baghdad’s problems as<br />
no worse than the worst neighborhoods of LA at that time.<br />
Imagine any U.S. inner-city with limited electrical power and interruptions<br />
of clean water supply; lack of refrigeration; ice available on the black market<br />
at high costs in money and time; limited public transportation; the burned<br />
out skeletons of cars, trucks, and military vehicles everywhere; crumbling<br />
infrastructure everywhere; debris in the streets; thick black smoke in the air<br />
coming from fires to dispose of debris; no relief from searing heat until the<br />
rains of September; 70 percent unemployment; interrupted income from<br />
police, civil service, and military jobs eliminated by OCPA decree; no<br />
telephone service; no postal service; and an unprecedented crime wave, then<br />
you can understand that it is the patience of the people Baghdad, a city of<br />
five million people, and their hope for better times that provide the primary<br />
security of U.S. troops. People offered different time lines for the endurance<br />
of this store of patience and hope but all acknowledged that the time for<br />
OCPA to demonstrate its competence was limited.<br />
A World of Black and White<br />
OCPA is impeded in its effort to restore public services, in part, by the U.S.<br />
preference for a policy based on the theology of good and evil and its<br />
obsession with the latter. Continuing resistance in Iraq and the attacks upon<br />
occupation forces, L. Paul Bremer III, OCPA head, and Secretary of Defense<br />
Donald Rumsfeld attribute to hardcore Sunni and Ba’athist loyalists, al-<br />
Qaeda, Iranians, and thugs; always some external enemy to U.S. virtue and<br />
“success.”<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
Students and faculty at the University of Baghdad with whom we spoke are<br />
adamant that the resistance in Falluja and other places is cultural not<br />
political. Men, who are arrested in a public and humiliating manner—face<br />
down on the ground with a display of deadly force and then having their<br />
hands tied behind their backs—have relatives who feel compelled to avenge<br />
the family or tribe dishonored by their treatment. Crackdowns, with more<br />
arrests, detentions, and injury to and death of innocent residents, increase the<br />
pool of resentment from which resistance emerges. Similarly, the shooting of<br />
a U.S. soldier at the University of Baghdad could be more cultural, dealing<br />
with the insufficiently respectful treatment of female students, than political<br />
in nature as Bremer suggested. As one dean summarized, “We are tired of<br />
waiting for respect for ourselves and our nation.”<br />
There are many causes of the lack of basic services and the continued<br />
resistance, some of them of our own making. To externalize the causes of<br />
these problems into people we demonize not only overlooks our part in the<br />
problem it delays our getting on with more appropriate solutions.<br />
Hubris<br />
THIS U.S. THEOLOGICAL ANALYSIS IS THE CAUSE and effect of a hubris that is<br />
the third and perhaps the most serious impediment to OCPA’s work. Having<br />
sidestepped and bullied the UN in its build up to the war and having<br />
discredited its inspection program as too slow and ineffective, the U.S. now<br />
seems reluctant to admit its need for the UN in its reconstruction effort.<br />
Indeed, the cup-is-half-full message from Bremer and the Pentagon, for<br />
whom he works, calls for satisfaction and pride in what has been done,<br />
patience with the remaining tasks, and understanding of the complexities of<br />
the work before OCPA. These, of course, are the sorts of attitudes that the<br />
U.S. would not tolerate as it picked its fight with Iraq.<br />
OCPA continues to use a dual standard in its work. The University of<br />
Baghdad presents one small case of this impediment. Because of one of<br />
Bremer’s most serious errors, blanket de-Ba’athification. Sami Al-Mudaffar,<br />
the newly elected president of the University of Baghdad, faces the problem<br />
of dealing with Iraq’s premier University’s future without some of the<br />
administrators who ran things in the past.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
Students, faculty, and other administrators distinguish “Saddamis’ from other<br />
Ba’athists. Saddamis believed in the party in their souls. They informed on<br />
students and faculty, put pressure on them to join the party, and withheld<br />
travel money, promotions, salary increases, and even teaching assignments<br />
unless they did. Some, it is claimed, even had students picked up, detained,<br />
tortured, and in some instances killed. The nominal Ba’athist, on the other<br />
hand, joined the party in outward appearances only so as not to impede their<br />
careers. They often covered for other colleagues’ dissent by lying about<br />
matters such as undergoing military training with their students as<br />
prescribed. Even these distinctions are not hard and fast but represent the<br />
foci of the elliptical orbits of evasion and repression within which faculty and<br />
students moved.<br />
They are very interested to see that those officials guilty of serious crimes<br />
against others receive lawful punishment. They are just as interested to see<br />
those outstanding teachers with only nominal Ba’athist credentials be<br />
retained to contribute to the teaching and scholarship of the University.<br />
Judging individuals by the characteristics of a group is a gross violation of<br />
human rights insists one de-Ba’athified faculty member.<br />
The hubris of de-Ba’athification stands out if applied to Bremer; hubris<br />
always employs a double-standard. How could the managing partner of<br />
Kissinger Associates be sufficiently “de-Kissingerized” to escape the taint of<br />
realpolitik without a hint of human values including the support of state<br />
terror in Chile and Indonesia? In a particularly relevant policy, Kissinger<br />
supported the Iranian Shah’s wish of support of the Kurds in their fight<br />
against Iraq in the 1970s as part of the grand strategy of the Cold War—Iran<br />
with the U.S., Saddam with the Soviets. The policy of the-enemy-of-myenemy-is-my-friend<br />
ended when the Shah decided that he would be friends<br />
with Iraq. Kissinger stopped aid to the Kurds and exposed them to retaliation<br />
by Iraq. In a statement that helps explain why some regard the Nobel Peace<br />
prize winner as an international war criminal, he explained famously that<br />
“Covert action should not be confused with missionary work.” Similarly,<br />
Bremer’s record of anti-terror study with the Heritage Foundation and focus<br />
on Iran suggests that “anti-terrorism should not be confused with national<br />
reconstruction.”<br />
The stakes are tremendous. Iraq, a nation of 24 million people, in 1980 was<br />
on the threshold of first world development. After three wars and 12 years of<br />
sanctions, Baghdad now longs for the standards of a third world country.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
U.S. occupation has brought the lowest standard of living that Iraqis have<br />
known. There is fear that the U.S. will, intentionally or not, diminish Iraq<br />
further to the level of Afghanistan.<br />
It is not enough for the U.S. Left to observe all this in hopes of a Bush<br />
failure. First of all, the humanitarian crisis that we largely avoided in the war<br />
could follow from water borne diseases, food shortages, and violence.<br />
Secondly, Iraqis will not permit the U.S. to fail its incidental liberation of<br />
Iraq and play out some Kissingeresque geopolitical strategy with its citizens,<br />
nation, and institutions. Full-scale armed resistance to occupation without<br />
liberation will occur and the U.S. will face suppressing the resistance and<br />
maintaining an occupation of Iraq similar to the Israeli policies in its<br />
occupied territories. This will benefit no one and undermine the security of<br />
Israel and the U.S. The U.S. is unlikely to choose to abandon its intentions<br />
of achieving Israel security through control of Iraqi oil revenues, no matter<br />
how ill-conceived the means or ill-gotten the goods. As Jefferson said of<br />
slavery, we have a wolf by the ears. We may not want to hold it but we know<br />
there is danger in letting it go.<br />
An Iraqi policy for the Left would include dealing directly with the<br />
impediments to success. Such a policy would:<br />
• Insist on immediate visible signs of good intentions and competence<br />
which means<br />
o immediate tangible signs of progress on the resumption of<br />
electrical service throughout the country but especially urban<br />
areas;<br />
� accountability of the large U.S. contractors with<br />
responsibility for reconstruction and demand<br />
immediate efforts with visible results and assurance<br />
that profits and favoritism are not holding up<br />
immediate action in this emergency situation; and<br />
o re-establish the Iraqi military and police as quickly as possible<br />
and give them the tasks for security.<br />
• Bring new focus on Israeli security and<br />
o distinguish between Zionism and Israeli security and explain<br />
that the first is antithetical to the second;<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
o acknowledge and end forty years of supporting the Israeli<br />
policy of military strength greater than any two Arab nations;<br />
and<br />
o acknowledge that the peace in the Middle East runs through<br />
Baghdad but has a different starting point than the one we<br />
have taken.<br />
� U.S. policies in Iraq should model new policies<br />
toward the Arab world rather than replicate<br />
Israeli/Palestinian relationships. This requires<br />
• a repudiation of past policies that used<br />
corruption, civil war, war between states, and<br />
coups to weak Arab states hostile to Israel and<br />
to maintain control of the region’s oil.<br />
• Establish democratic processes of governance and due process of<br />
punishment by<br />
o Turning over to the UN the task of establishing a national<br />
government in a truly democratic process that goes beyond<br />
giving Iraqis choices among U.S. preferences or manipulation<br />
of a new government to achieve the covert purposes of the<br />
U.S. invasion of Iraq;<br />
� This may mean establishing a government that may<br />
provide for Israel’s security in a manner different from<br />
U.S. and Israel’s preferences—nuclear disarmament,<br />
inspections for weapons of mass destruction, etc.<br />
o preclude from government and public office only those<br />
former officials duly tried and found guilty of crimes against<br />
Iraqi law or humanity.<br />
• End the sequential obsession with surrogates for elusive terrorists by<br />
o disconnecting Iraq from the war on terror and force our<br />
national leaders to admit that they manipulated the nation<br />
into fear for its security as a means to pursue other unstated<br />
policies;<br />
o ending the obsession with a purge of Ba’athist and other<br />
symbols of Saddam; and<br />
o describing U.S. efforts as war reparations;<br />
� acknowledge the U.S. part in bringing the Ba’athist to<br />
power, maintaining Saddam Hussein even through<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Richard A. Couto<br />
the bloody political purges of the 1960s, and<br />
supplying him with biological and chemical weapons<br />
material and<br />
o acknowledging the role that the U.S. insistence on the most<br />
stringent UN sanctions against Iraq played in reducing the<br />
infrastructure.<br />
We need to make the U.S. incidental liberation of Iraq into a deliberate,<br />
intentional, and successful international effort and we do not have much time<br />
to show our intentions and competence. Baghdad will probably sizzle the<br />
entire summer. We can hope, however, that serious discussion and some<br />
immediate action can support the hope of Iraqis for improvements to come<br />
and cool things off long enough to permit an intentional, effective,<br />
international, and genuine liberation of Iraq to begin. While we are doing<br />
this, of course, we must also pursue regime change in the U.S.<br />
Richard A. Couto is co-chair of the Task Force on Liaison with the University of<br />
Baghdad of Conscience International and professor of Leadership and Change at<br />
Antioch University. He traveled to the University of Baghdad in January for a<br />
symposium on peace and in June to renew conversations about the reconstruction<br />
of higher education.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
W<br />
Henry Pachter<br />
Who Are the Palestinians?<br />
by<br />
Henry Pachter<br />
ho are they, the Palestinians, and who has the right to speak for them?<br />
Oppressed nationalities find it difficult to get a hearing because those<br />
who pretend to represent them are often political adventurers who merely<br />
exploit them—whether for other powers’ imperialistic purposes or to vent on<br />
imaginary enemies their own hatred of the world. This is true of the Somalis,<br />
the Irish, the Bengalis, the Ibos; it is twice as true of the Palestinians because<br />
their country happens to lie at the crossroads of a world power struggle.<br />
Nowhere else do local enmities serve so many outside masters; nowhere else<br />
do foreign interests spread so much confusion about the very identity of the<br />
people whom they are pretending to save.<br />
So, first of all let us agree: like most Irish, most Palestinians are not terrorists;<br />
but like many Ulstermen or Basques, many Palestinians will condone or even<br />
applaud acts of terrorism as long as they lack other means to express what<br />
they consider their just grievances, and as long as those grievances continue to<br />
be seen as just by others. Let us also agree that their plight is not of their own<br />
making; they have been objects of other people’s policies for three thousand<br />
years.<br />
Palestine, the land of the Philistines, a Semitic people that once was<br />
subjugated by Joshua and by David, has retained that name through the<br />
centuries as it was conquered by Hittites, Egyptians, Babylonians, Assyrians,<br />
Persians, Greeks, Romans, Arabs, (1) Christians from the West, Osmanli<br />
Turks, and the British. Until recently in modern times it was sparsely settled,<br />
mostly by Arab Bedouins, and considered part of Syria. A movement to<br />
liberate and unite the Arabs, then under Turkish domination, existed long<br />
before the First World War.<br />
Then the British used Arab tribesmen to wrest Palestine, Mesopotamia<br />
(Iraq), and Syria from the Turks, promising them”sovereignty” and selfdetermination.<br />
After prolonged uprisings those parts of Syria that lay east of<br />
the Jordan River were given to Hashemite sheiks, who thereafter were called<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
kings; the part west of the Jordan River was styled the British Mandate of<br />
Palestine and supposed to evolve toward self-government; northern Syria<br />
became a French mandate. The terms of the mandates were illegal even by<br />
the standards of the Covenant of the League of Nations, which was their<br />
covering law. Previously, a unilateral declaration by Foreign Minister Arthur<br />
Balfour had designated “Palestine” as a “Jewish homeland”; but at the same<br />
time Weizmann and Lord Harlech assured the Arabs that this should not<br />
interfere with Arab aspirations to sovereignty.<br />
What these terms meant or how to reconcile them was never spelled out<br />
except in Balfour’s memoirs, where he wondered how anybody could have<br />
been misled into thinking that they meant anything (2). But on the evidence<br />
of contemporary customs and conditions, the Balfour Declaration was<br />
consistent with a Jewish immigration rate of 50,000 a year and a ratio of two<br />
to one between Muslims and Jews. In 1930, after serious Arab riots,<br />
immigration was severely restricted-just when Jews were desperate, not for a<br />
homeland but for a place of asylum. At the outbreak of World War II, the<br />
population consisted of 456,000 Jews and 1.1 million Muslims; at its end,<br />
the census counted 1.143 million Muslims, 583,000 Jews, and 145,000<br />
Christians.<br />
The Holocaust and the war left the Allies with a “disposal problem” in<br />
western Europe: nearly 100,000 East European Jews who had been made<br />
homeless by persecution and political changes were languishing in displacedpersons<br />
camps, fed by charitable contributions and government aid, mostly<br />
from the United States which, however, did not lift its own restrictions on<br />
immigrants from Eastern Europe. Responding to strong pressures from<br />
Zionist organizations—and minding the electoral situation at home—<br />
President Truman resolved the problem by agreeing to the foundation of a<br />
Jewish state in Palestine. Soviet diplomacy gladly gave its assent, viewing any<br />
diminution of the British Empire as so much gain for itself, and hoping to<br />
ingratiate itself with both Jews and Arabs.<br />
At first the British wanted to build a base in Haifa because, ironically, they<br />
were about to fulfill another Arab demand: to evacuate the base in<br />
Alexandria. On the other hand, a White Paper of 1939 also promised<br />
independence to Palestine. Weary of Arab terrorism and immediately<br />
prompted by Jewish terrorism, the Labour Party government decided to<br />
abandon the thankless task of policing the peace between Jews and Arabs. (3)<br />
The deal was consummated by a United Nations Security Council resolution<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
(4) the only instrument of international law on which the state of lsrael can<br />
base its existence.<br />
It is therefore necessary to remember that the United Nations at that time<br />
created not one state but two on the west side of the Jordan: one Jewish and<br />
one Arab. The Jewish state so created was totally nonviable: it consisted of<br />
three noncontiguous parts encompassing most Jewish settlements and a like<br />
number of Arab settlements. Even Ben Gurion, however, accepted this rump<br />
territory because at that time he still assumed that Palestine would remain an<br />
economic unit where two peoples would be able to develop in symbiosis—a<br />
binational state in all but name.<br />
A word about this assumed symbiosis. Not only Jews but Arabs too had come<br />
into Palestine, attracted by the higher wages and better working conditions<br />
under Jewish employers, or simply by the promise of prosperity that the<br />
Jewish immigration and its foreign backers brought to the country. The<br />
Jewish labor organization, Histadruth, had seen with alarm how fellow Jews<br />
were hiring Arab labor at low wages while Jewish immigrants were jobless.<br />
From the early 1920s on, therefore, the Histadruth had been waging a<br />
campaign “to fight for places to work.” (5) Its strongly nationalistic appeal<br />
brought quick success to this campaign: by the 1930s Arabs worked for Jews<br />
mostly in menial positions that Jewish workers would not accept. Even so, a<br />
remarkable number of Arabs in Palestine prospered, learned mechanical<br />
skills, and went to college, so that former Palestinians now occupy enviable<br />
positions in all Arab countries as executives, opinion leaders, professional<br />
people, foremen, and skilled workers.<br />
There is no doubt that the socioeconomic upset emanating from Jewish<br />
Palestine was one of the reasons for Arab sheiks, kings, and capitalists to fear<br />
the establishment of a Jewish state. Another was the threat of Jewish mass<br />
immigration and the growth of a new power center that was bound to<br />
subvert the status quo in the Middle East. At that time, only twenty years<br />
after the Balfour Declaration, Zionism was still considered a tool of British<br />
imperialism, and the Mufti of Jerusalem broadcast for Hitler from Berlin<br />
during the Second World War. To him, as to many Arabs today, Zionism<br />
was the imperialists’ base in the Middle East.<br />
A lot of silly arguments have been heard about this catchword, imperialism.<br />
Does it apply to Zionism? It is true that Orde Wingate trained the Haganah<br />
(Jewish underground defense organization); but another British officer,<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
Glubb Pasha, led the army of Transjordan. And eighty years before these<br />
events, Lord Palmerston sponsored the unification of Italy; will anyone<br />
therefore charge that Garibaldi was a tool of British imperialism? The Jewish<br />
state was the goal of a national conquest; its conflict with Arab states or Arab<br />
interests is on the order of national rivalries, and this remains true even if<br />
Jews or Arabs or both are allied with imperial powers. At one time the British<br />
favored the Jews, but after 1930 they found Zionist presumptions<br />
increasingly embarrassing. Zionism exploited British power and then turned<br />
against it. The British, in turn, contrary to Lenin’s theory of imperialism, did<br />
not mean to “exploit” Palestine economically but, as the mandate power, to<br />
prohibit the development of Jewish industries.<br />
The United States has invested heavily in Arab oil developments. The charge<br />
that it uses Israel to keep the sheiks docile, however, is totally unfounded<br />
and, on the face of it, ridiculous. The policy of the oil companies and of the<br />
State Department has been consistently pro-Arab unless one defines as pro-<br />
Israel any policy not aiming at the destruction of the Jewish state. The<br />
responsibility for Israel’s preservation, as for some other elements of the status<br />
quo the United States is committed to defend, has been a heavy burden. But<br />
it is in the nature of empires to be drawn into national border conflicts where<br />
their clients have interests, and very often they would rather not have to<br />
support them. Far from being used by the Russians or the Americans for their<br />
purposes, both Arabs and Jews have deliberately involved their big brothers in<br />
their own defense concerns.<br />
Much has been made of the Histadruth’s job policy. Obviously, in terms of<br />
Lenin’s theory of imperialism, Jewish business has not been guilty of<br />
exploiting cheap Arab labor; rather, Jewish colonists have been guilty of<br />
making Arabs jobless and driving them from their lands. I have to explain<br />
here a subtlety of feudal law: fellahin can be sold along with the land on<br />
which they have been sitting, but the land cannot be sold without them; it<br />
cannot be pulled away from under their feet. When the Jewish agency, aware<br />
only of capitalist law, bought land from the callous effendis, it may honestly<br />
have thought that thereby it had acquired the right to expel the fellahin,<br />
which repeats the story of the “enclosures,” well known to readers of Marx’s<br />
Capital. As the Phoenicians had done at Carthage and the Athenians in<br />
Sicily, the Jews acquired land and Jewish colons “settled” it. This is the<br />
original meaning of “colonization.” (6)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
Notwithstanding Lenin, it may be called an imperialist policy on the part of<br />
the nation that hopes to prevail in such a fight for the land. Jewish settlers,<br />
who had naively begun to cultivate this ground -including kibbutzniks who<br />
did so in the name of socialism - wondered why the former owners or tenants<br />
of those grounds were firing at them or staging surprise attacks on their<br />
innocent children; from the vantage point of the expelled Palestinians, the<br />
settlers were usurpers, colonizers, imperialists in flesh and blood, not just the<br />
tools of mysterious powers across the sea. (7)<br />
This is the background of the war of 1948, which resulted in Israel’s<br />
conquest of a contiguous territory (within the boundaries of 1948-1967) and<br />
in the Hashemite annexation of territory west of the Jordan River, including<br />
part of Jerusalem and such Biblical cities as Bethlehem and Nablus. Perhaps<br />
even more important for our present purposes, it resulted in the flight of<br />
600,000 Arabs from their native home (8). In the light of the communal<br />
strife that had preceded the British pullout, that flight is totally<br />
understandable. A sensible person avoids being in anybody’s line of fire,<br />
especially in this kind of civil war. The Jewish defense organizations had<br />
taken care to project an image of fierceness. Some, like Menachem Begin’s<br />
Irgun Zwai Leumi and the Stern gang, were outright terrorists; their tactics<br />
appalled even Ben Gurion. (9) In June 1945 the Irgun blew up the King<br />
David Hotel, causing ninety-one deaths. British soldiers were shot by snipers;<br />
cars loaded with dynamite were driven into British army camps. Do these<br />
people have a right to complain about terrorism? Even the Palmach, the<br />
combat organization of the Haganah, blew up bridges and derailed trains.<br />
The crimes that had been committed in a few—fortunately very few—places<br />
had frightened the Arabs; when war came to their area, they followed the<br />
advice to stay clear of it. In so doing, they indicated that they were not taking<br />
part in the war operations. Clearly, in all wars of the past, displaced<br />
populations did expect to go back to their places of home, of work, of<br />
personal contacts. To keep them from returning, to forbid them a choice<br />
between staying abroad and accepting conquest, violates custom and<br />
international law—in fact it is a crime. Yet, for reasons of national policy, the<br />
Israeli government seized this opportunity to create a demographically<br />
homogeneous Jewish state. (10)<br />
IT WAS AT THIS MOMENT, and through this deed, that the issue of “the<br />
Palestinians” was created. So far, we have encountered Palestinians as the<br />
inhabitants of an area that might include all of the present state of Jordan, or<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
only the population of the Mandate territory. Now the name has come to<br />
define almost exclusively the million Arabs who claimed that they had been<br />
expelled from their homeland and who were forced to live in primitive camps<br />
spread outside Israel in the Gaza strip, on the West Bank, in Lebanon, and in<br />
Syria. These camps were maintained by UNRRA, a United Nations affiliate,<br />
and financed mostly by American contributions.<br />
Aside from the moral and humanitarian outrage they constitute, maintaining<br />
these camps was a political mistake of the first order. They became hotbeds of<br />
unrest, recruiting grounds for terrorist organizations, breeding places for<br />
corruption, blackmail, and crime. A few cents a day per head, amounting to<br />
many millions of dollars per year, meant an invitation to count many heads<br />
twice. The fraudulent claim that there are 2 million people in those camps is<br />
clearly exposed by the census figures of 1946. Even if every single Arab in all<br />
of Palestine had fled, there could still not be more than 1.2 million. Of<br />
course in the thirty years that have elapsed, the original 600,000 have been<br />
blessed with children and grandchildren; even some “dead souls” may have<br />
been procreative.<br />
No one denies that many Arabs on the West Bank considered the miserable<br />
allowance in the camps preferable to their normal subsistence under Arab<br />
governments. On the other hand, genuine refugees from Palestine left the<br />
camps and found lucrative employment in other Arab states; many others<br />
died. All remain statistics in the camp population, and so are their children,<br />
although the children may live in other countries. By the most conservative<br />
statistics, therefore, more than half of the present camp inmates never lived in<br />
Israel. The Israelis who justify their claim to the land by the tribal memory of<br />
two thousand years obviously have no argument against people whose claim<br />
is based on tribal memories reaching back only thirty years. More than the<br />
expellees’ actual misery, the bitterness of the sacrifice that was imposed on<br />
them intensifies the hatred that defines the Palestinians as a nation distinct<br />
from other Arabs.<br />
Should the displaced Palestinians have been admitted by other Arab states?<br />
The Germans expelled from Eastern Europe after the Second World War<br />
were among the Federal Republic’s greatest assets. England admitted West<br />
Indians and mestizos whose country had become someone’s state. Why do<br />
not Syria, Egypt, Lebanon, or rich Kuwait, Algeria, Saudi Arabia help their<br />
Palestinian brothers—for whom they shed such abundant tears—get<br />
integrated into their countries? Although the oil sheiks have the means, they<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
feel no obligation to do so. (11) Actually, they would rather use these<br />
unfortunate victims of national wars as pawn in their own game of power<br />
politics. They are not interested in healing this wound; they want it to fester,<br />
but in the body of Israel, and in the body of world peace.<br />
How could this have been prevented? At some point between 1948 and<br />
1968, the United States should have stopped subsidizing the refugee camps<br />
and Israel should have made an offer that might have, in one bold stroke,<br />
drastically reduced the number of “Palestinians” and disarmed their<br />
militancy. The offer should have been based on recognition of legitimate<br />
claims by those who could prove that they had lost their property, home, or<br />
job in the present territory of Israel. They should have been given the option<br />
of either a settlement in money or return under Israeli law. Since the<br />
conditions of life as a second-class citizen are never enviable, even when the<br />
nationalities are not emotionally hostile to each other, I believe that few<br />
Palestinians would have opted for return. Most would rather have taken the<br />
money, especially if at the same time U.S. subsidies had been ended. (12)<br />
The Jewish authorities and public opinion have rejected such proposals on<br />
the twofold ground that Israel could not accommodate so many Arabs<br />
without disrupting her economy and without endangering the safety of her<br />
state. (13) The first part of this rejoinder sounds odd in view of their steady<br />
clamor for more immigrants from countries holding more Jews than there are<br />
Arab statistics in the camps. The second part is refuted by the results of the<br />
Six-Day War, which has added another million Arabs to the population of<br />
Israel and many Israelis now speak of a “Greater Israel.”<br />
Most Israelis would probably want to keep the occupied areas if they could<br />
move the Arabs out, while Arab nationalism, strangely, demands the return<br />
of uninhabited desert first and liberation of the bemoaned brothers later.<br />
In fact, Palestinians are not just the refugees in the camps of 1948. There are<br />
a million Arabs who live under military authorities in conquered territory.<br />
Despite the greater prosperity that annexation has brought to them, they are<br />
a source of unrest and an acute danger to peace. There can be no settlement,<br />
no truce, and no confidence between Arabs and Jews as long as their status is<br />
not determined equitably and as long as there is no international machinery<br />
to ascertain the will of the Palestinians themselves. Unless a political dialogue<br />
is initiated between Israel and responsible Arab leaders—a dialogue about<br />
concrete proposals, that will satisfy legitimate claims—Yasir Arafat will step<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
into the vacuum and pretend that he knows what the Palestinians want, and<br />
he will go on blackmailing his Arab friends and the international community.<br />
He also has rivals: should he not occupy the vacuum, some terrorist group or<br />
perhaps even the Communist Party will. The ball, therefore, is in Israel’s<br />
court. (14)<br />
At the time of the Six-Day War, the Israeli government declared that it<br />
would hold the occupied territories only as pawns and evacuate them in<br />
return for a peace treaty. It has offered to pay compensation to those who<br />
have lost property in old Palestine—or rather, to allow the United States to<br />
make such payments; but it has not given refugees a choice of taking<br />
payment or returning. Meanwhile, the cancer of the Palestinians not only<br />
continues to fester but is being transplanted to the world arena, where it eats<br />
away the possibilities of peaceful coexistence. A decision is urgently needed to<br />
attack the primary point of the evil. Neither recriminations about the past<br />
nor legal constructions of right and wrong are required. What is required is<br />
finding political answers to political problems.<br />
The offer to receive or to compensate legitimate claimants might be made<br />
with greater confidence by the Israeli government if at the same time the<br />
Palestinians were to be offered a state of their own. It has been suggested that<br />
the West Bank and the Gaza strip—two noncontiguous territories—would<br />
constitute such a state. Unfortunately, that state would not be economically<br />
viable; hence it would be a pawn in the political game of the oil sheiks. Nor<br />
would such a proposal be politically acceptable without including the Arab<br />
part of Jerusalem. The Israelis are loath to give up any part of Jerusalem, and<br />
there is at this time no device of condominium or international control that<br />
would make the administration of the city possible without friction. It is clear<br />
that the real point of the quarrel is not viability but sovereignty. All the<br />
principals are too primitive in their tribal instincts or too immature as nations<br />
to be reasonable on questions where self-respect is at stake. Therefore, the<br />
solution for Jerusalem will have to be imposed by the great powers; it cannot<br />
be negotiated between the parties concerned. As long as they pretend to<br />
negotiate about it, they merely indicate that they do not mean to make peace.<br />
By contrast, the return of the occupied territories must be negotiated by<br />
Israel itself with its neighbors, and the return of the refugees can be<br />
negotiated only privately between the Israeli government and those private<br />
parties who claim to have been residents of the area now under the<br />
government’s jurisdiction. By its very nature, this cannot be a problem<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
between Israel and Egypt or Syria, for neither of these countries claims<br />
sovereignty in Palestine. It could be negotiated between Israel and a state that<br />
can speak in the name of the Palestinians. These are a distinct people,<br />
different in background and culture from the Bedouins of Jordan, from the<br />
mercantile Lebanese, from the temperamental Syrians, from the millennia old<br />
Egyptians. They must determine their own fate, both in Israel and in the<br />
West Bank area. They would probably prefer to sever their political ties with<br />
Jordan and might be interested in economic arrangements, to mutual<br />
advantage, with Israel. It stands to reason that they would rather not fight<br />
Boumédienne’s wars and that the skimpy subsidies some of their guerrillas<br />
are getting from oil sheiks cannot substitute for a developmental plan and a<br />
technology to go with it. In the long run, a Palestinian state on the West<br />
Bank might easily fall into Israel’s orbit, or become a client of Moscow,<br />
Beijing, Washington, Teheran—who knows?<br />
It is not necessary to believe that appeasement will bring an early cessation of<br />
terrorist attacks or a lowering of the level of invective in Arab rhetoric. But it<br />
may lay the foundation of a more constructive relationship between the Arabs<br />
and Jews on the local level and perhaps bring to old Palestine some kind of<br />
unity on the basis of economic interests and businesslike relations. In other<br />
words: it is necessary to strip this political problem of ideology. Although in<br />
this age everybody is “raising consciousness” or seeking to establish an<br />
identity, there is altogether too much of that in the Middle East. The<br />
Palestinians speak Arabic and worship in mosques; but they have come from<br />
many countries and have intermarried with many conquering nations. Their<br />
identity is of rather recent origin, through the misfortunes of war and yet<br />
another foreign conquest. Their appeasement ought to be less difficult than<br />
their arousal. They are looking for opportunities. I am even tempted to say<br />
that they can be bought; but they are being terrorized, and this may be the<br />
greatest obstacle to peace at this moment.<br />
Can Israel wager her security on the vague prospect that one day the<br />
Palestinians might not only awaken but also mature? There are no<br />
alternatives, and one must look for solutions that have some promise of<br />
lasting. One may hope to prevent an explosion though one may not be able<br />
to remove the dynamite. Above all one must divide, not unite, one’s enemies.<br />
Third World strategists have made the Palestinian issue into a cutting edge of<br />
their attack on Western positions in world politics. To blunt that edge, it is<br />
not necessary for the United States to take drastic measures, though it needs<br />
to radically rethink the issue. The friends of Israel—and, surprisingly, that<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
includes many who have valiantly criticized “Cold war attitudes” in U. S.<br />
policies—are tied to the confrontational patterns of the past decades; they<br />
think in terms of security rather than in political terms. They have missed<br />
valuable opportunities for peace in the past ten years. They gamble on the<br />
survival chances of a particular structure of the Israeli state, which is a<br />
dangerous gamble at best and is becoming more dangerous every day. The<br />
thought of having Arab citizens in their midst horrifies the Israelis; but while<br />
staring at that danger, they don’t see the gathering of Arab armies outside the<br />
gate. They have too much confidence that the gate can be held shut for all<br />
time; this is an illusion for which others have paid dearly. In the long run,<br />
security lies only in the confidence of one’s neighbors.<br />
Aware that I have made some controversial statements, I want to make clear<br />
that the issue is neither moral nor judicial, but political. Those who wish to<br />
debate my proposal should refrain from reminding me who “started it” or<br />
who is “more to blame” or whose “rights” are better. Wherever I have<br />
touched upon such questions, my intention has merely been to show how<br />
Palestinians see them, and that is a political fact, not a moral judgment.<br />
Notes<br />
1. Arabs today identify themselves only by speech. Originally the term<br />
means conquerors coming from the Peninsula.<br />
2. In 1922, Colonial Secretary Winston Churchill rejected the<br />
interpretation that Arab laws and customs had to be subordinated to<br />
Jewish interests, and Arab representatives rejected every constitution<br />
the British or the League of Nations tried to impose on the country.<br />
The Arab Congress in 1928 demanded a “fully democratic”<br />
government—whatever that meant in terms of Arab constitutions.<br />
3. Foreign Secretary Ernest Bevin was no “anti-Semite”; he simply<br />
dropped a hot potato that cost England 50 million pounds a year. He<br />
was not the only Englishman, however, to wonder why the Jews were<br />
turning against England—of all nations—which had fought Hitler.<br />
Gratitude is not a political word, but bitterness is.<br />
4. The United Nations then had fifty-seven members; obviously the<br />
resolution would not pass today. Except for states recognized in the<br />
Westphalian Peace Treaty (1648) and at the Vienna Congress (1815),<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
no other state has received such sanction. States are usually a product<br />
of violence.<br />
5. This was the term used abroad; the Hebrew term sounds less<br />
offensive.<br />
6. A reader points out that the number affected was comparatively small<br />
and that terrorism developed mostly in the cities. Unfortunately, the<br />
symbolic and political value of the object does not depend on its size<br />
or price.<br />
7. “The revolt is largely manned by the peasantry, that is to say by the<br />
people whose life and livelihood are on the soil but who have no say<br />
whatever in its disposal; and their anger and violence are as much<br />
directed against the Arab landowners and brokers who have facilitated<br />
the sales as against the policy of the mandatory Power under whose<br />
aegis the transactions have taken place. The fact that some of those<br />
landowners have served on national Arab bodies makes them only<br />
more odious to the insurgent peasantry and has rendered it less<br />
amenable to the influence of the political leaders as a whole.” George<br />
Antonius, The Arab Awakening: The Story of the Arab National<br />
Movement (New York: Lippincott, 1939), pp. 406-7. The Jewish<br />
leaders—except for the Communists, Martin Buber, and some<br />
chalutzim—never thought of allying themselves with these victims of<br />
colonization. See Bernard Avishai in Dissent, Spring 1975.<br />
8. Some say the number was 800,000—more than had been living in<br />
the Jewish half of Palestine.<br />
9. Obviously, what applies to Arabs must apply to Jews. Most Jews may<br />
not have approved of terrorism—though my father, usually one of<br />
the most law-abiding citizens, did; but Arabs are even less able than<br />
Jews to distinguish between factions in the other camp. The crime<br />
must be condemned; an entire people must not be condemned for it.<br />
But I am not arguing here about the morality of terror; my aim is to<br />
establish the fact that the Arab population felt threatened.<br />
10. Unfortunately, socialists like Dissent contributors Avishai and N.<br />
Gordon Levin have defended this theft on the ground that “socialist<br />
values” can be realized better in a securely Jewish environment.<br />
Would they agree with the Soviet government that “Soviet values”<br />
can be realized better in an environment that does not include<br />
Solzhenitsyn, Pasternak, or Trotsky?<br />
11. Israel claims that she accepted a million Oriental Jews, mostly<br />
expelled from the Arab countries. The rationale of the Jewish<br />
”homeland,” however, conflicts with the suggestion that these should<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Henry Pachter<br />
be balanced against the Arab expellees. They would be entitled to<br />
Israeli citizenship even without being harassed in Baghdad. Besides, a<br />
forcible population exchange is repugnant from any internationalist<br />
perspective.<br />
12. Gordon Levin rejects the notion that readmission could “serve [any]<br />
real human interests besides a satisfaction of Arab honor.” But that is<br />
a question of deep concern, and it is in Israel’s power to restore that<br />
sense of honor.<br />
13. It seems that Zionism has abandoned its earliest propaganda, which<br />
claimed that a Jewish state would make its Arab citizens happy and<br />
contented.<br />
14. Arab notables in the occupied areas are subject to intimidation; some<br />
Israelis therefore think that Arafat is the only available partner. It is<br />
certain that no parley is now conceivable without him, a calamity that<br />
conforms to the pattern of the Israeli’s poor grasp of diplomatic<br />
realities: they have always been forced to choose between two evils<br />
after they had rejected an alternative that would have been, after all,<br />
second best.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
I<br />
Abbas Amanat<br />
From ijtihad to wilayat-i faqih:<br />
The Evolving of the Shi’ite Legal Authority to Political Power<br />
by<br />
Abbas Amanat<br />
n November 2002 an Iranian professor of history, Hashim Aghajari, a<br />
veteran of the Iran-Iraq war, was sentenced to death by the Islamic<br />
revolutionary court in <strong>Hamad</strong>an among other counts for questioning the<br />
practice of blind “emulating/following” (taqlid) of the mujtahids in matters of<br />
belief and practice. His sentencing led to several days of widespread<br />
university protests fueled by Aghajari’s refusal to appeal his death sentence.<br />
What incensed the Iranian court which accused him of blasphemy was that,<br />
by implication, Aghajari was denying the “authority/guardianship of the<br />
jurist” (Persian, wilayat-i faqih; Arabic, al-wilaya al-faqih), the very founding<br />
principal of the Islamic Republic. Aghajari’s objection aimed not merely at<br />
the practice of taqlid, but the legitimacy (or their lack of) of the “guardian<br />
jurist” (wali-yi faqih), the “supreme leader” of the Islamic Republic. This new<br />
anti-clerical quest for Islamic modernity naturally steered much interest<br />
among younger generations of Iranians.<br />
Aghajaris’ speech commemorated ’Ali Shari’ati, the renowned revolutionary<br />
reformist. Invoking Shari’ati’s notion of “Islamic Protestantism” as the only<br />
way to liberate the society from the impasse of the “traditional Islam,”<br />
Aghajari was striving to arrive at a new historical understanding of the Shi’ite<br />
heritage. Though still grounded in the Qur’an and hadith, this new reading<br />
was engaged more deeply with modernity, human rights and plurality.<br />
Aghajari called for social justice and democracy in economy and in politics<br />
though he implicitly distanced himself from Shari’ati’s firebrand<br />
revolutionary rhetoric. He does not remain untouched by Shari’ati’s<br />
exhortations to be the prophet of Protestant Islam, a claim made by a<br />
number of Islamic reformers including the celebrated Jamal al-Din<br />
“Afghani,” the Iranian pan-Islamic activist of the 19th century. Yet he goes so<br />
far as criticizing the Shi’ite establishment for its culture of condescension<br />
especially in the exercise of ijtihad:<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
The people are not monkeys who merely imitate. The pupil<br />
understands and then acts, and then tries to expand his own<br />
understanding, so someday he will not need the teacher. He<br />
can himself directly look up (the sources) and deduct and<br />
form an opinion. The relationship that the traditional<br />
institution (i.e. the clerical establishment) seeks is one of<br />
master and the follower; the master remains master and the<br />
follower remains follower. Forever these shackles straps<br />
around his neck. The relationship of the (real) scholar (`alim )<br />
with people is a critical one. Since he has expert knowledge,<br />
we listen to him as a scholar. Whenever we find something<br />
objectionable, we criticize, we debate. He is not a saintly<br />
celestial being to be treated by us as a divine figure. Of course<br />
this class (i.e. the clergy) first turned the infallible (Shi`ite)<br />
Imams to divine figures so that they themselves could pose as<br />
divine representatives of the Imams. 1<br />
Such critique of the abiding authority of ijtihad and that of the so-called<br />
“source of emulation” (marja’-i taqlid) inevitably bring to light the much<br />
debated issue of legal authority in Shi’ite Islam and, more specifically, the<br />
problem of institutionalization of ijtihad. He obviously does not address<br />
openly the wilayat-i faqih, but his reference to the “imam” in the above<br />
passage, as in other allusions sprinkled throughout his speech, signifies the<br />
obvious to his sensitive audience. He deliberately seems to have touched on a<br />
sore point since the doctrine of the “guardianship of the jurists,” it can be<br />
argued, stands on shaky legal grounds. Shi’ism never historically or<br />
institutionally made the necessary leap from the loosely defined ijtihad to a<br />
centralized marja’iya, let alone ever develop the theoretical ground for<br />
creating a universal judicial authority.<br />
Before the time of Ayatollah Khomeini, Shi’i legal thought never did<br />
seriously engage in the sphere of public law and consequently never<br />
articulated a coherent theory of government. Even in the safety of the<br />
madrasa, Shi’ite law remained entirely preoccupied with the articulation of<br />
civil and private law as practiced in the mujtahid-run civil courts. Such<br />
practice of ijtihad was never systematized or subjected to clear and universally<br />
accepted norms, one may venture to say, almost by choice. The Shi’ite law on<br />
which the mujtahids relied remained a matter of interpretation and scholastic<br />
scrutiny largely within the madrasa environment rather than through the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
practice of the law. Throughout the Safavid and the early Qajar periods (16th<br />
to 19th centuries) Shi’ite law acquired a remarkable level of sophistication,<br />
especially in the theoretical field of the “roots of jurisprudence” (usul al-fiqh).<br />
Yet both in the study of the rudiments (furu’) and in the methodology of usul<br />
al-fiqh Shi’ite scholarship resisted systematic codification beyond what was<br />
established by earlier scholars largely between the 10th and 14th centuries.<br />
Even the “emergence” of the status of the “supreme exemplar” (marja’-i<br />
taqlid, lit. the source of emulation) in the 19th century remained largely an<br />
informal practice. No set of objective standards for designating such a<br />
leadership ever developed and no specific legal privileges were arrogated to<br />
this office. As late as the middle of the 20 th century, the marja’iyat was largely<br />
aimed at addressing the needs for a communal leadership rather than a<br />
supreme legal authority. No marj’a before Ayatullah Burujerdi ever claimed<br />
his legal opinions to be universally binding. Nor any of the marja’s claimed<br />
to be standing at the apex of a judicial hierarchy or was accepted as such by<br />
the mujtahids or by the community at large. Whenever they effectively<br />
exercised their legal power, as in the tobacco rebellion of 1890-91 or during<br />
the Constitutional Revolution of 1906-1911 or the banning of the drinking<br />
of Pepsi Cola in the 1950s, the marja’s relied on their popularity and prestige<br />
rather than any legal precept. The three preconditions for a marja’, being the<br />
most learned (a’lam), the most judicious (a’dal), and the most pious (atqa),<br />
were qualities barely measurable by legal or academic standards. No<br />
institutional procedure was ever set to determine such preconditions. What<br />
in reality determined success of a marja’, or for that matter any mujtahid, was<br />
his popularity and the size of his follower constituency (or congregation).<br />
The question thus remains as to what process, historical and legal,<br />
transformed this informal and democratically chaotic form of defuse judicial<br />
leadership into a binding, all-embracing, and authoritative office of the<br />
wilayat-i faqih with claim over the judicial and political authority.<br />
Ijtihad and the Usuli interpretation of judicial authority<br />
As early as the 10th century the so-called 12th Shi’ite (Ithna ’Ashari) jurists<br />
recognized the Occultation (ghayba) of the 12th Imam, the state of his<br />
invisible (but directly inaccessible) existence in the physical world, as the<br />
chief postulate for denouncing any form of temporal power in the absence of<br />
the Imam as inherently unjust and therefore illegitimate. Only the return of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
the Imam in an undetermined moment in future, it was believed, could<br />
establish on earth the ultimate values of justice and legitimate rule. This<br />
absolutist messianic belief in the Imam’s eventual establishing of a utopian<br />
perfect order has often been viewed as the chief obstacle on the way of<br />
articulating a legal public space in Shi’ism. The same rationale also barred in<br />
theory any legitimate collaboration between the jurists and the state. Every<br />
government was in theory seen as inherently oppressive. The same principle<br />
of avoiding political collaboration was conducive to the flourishing of the<br />
Shi’ite study of hadith, as means of emulating the models of the Prophet and<br />
the Imams, and early development of jurisprudence (fiqh) focusing on civil<br />
and contractual law as well as on devotional acts and obligations.<br />
In practice, however, the quietist tendency among the Shi’ite jurists, as<br />
opposed to powerful messianic trends throughout the Shi’ite past,<br />
encouraged compliance and even collaboration with the “unjust” and<br />
“tyrannical” (ja’ir) state especially if and when the state was accommodating<br />
the Shi’is. This de facto acceptance of the temporal power, needless to say,<br />
was in full agreement with the ancient Persian notion of the “sisterhood” of<br />
the religious and the state institutions, a interdependency perceived to be<br />
essential for the endurance of both institutions and the stability of the social<br />
order against the corrupting influence of “bad religion” (i.e., the antinomian,<br />
often messianic, alternatives to legalistic Shi’ism). While the state maintained<br />
peace and order, upheld the shari’a, defended the domain, and guarded the<br />
jurists’ vested interests, the jurists were in turn expected to maintain good<br />
relations with the state, and even serve in the state-controlled judiciary.<br />
Already by the 14th century the Shi’ite jurists developed an elaborate legal<br />
system of private law based on ijtihad, the exercise of logical reasoning by<br />
utilizing the sources of the law to form qualified legal opinion within a<br />
specific timeframe. The exercise of ijtihad in turn led to the development of<br />
an elaborate methodology of jurisprudence, the science of the usul al-fiqh.<br />
Some of the best legal minds articulated complex linguistic debates on legal<br />
semantics and phenomenological discussions on the authority of the text. Yet<br />
oddly enough, usul al-fiqh avoided systematic debate on ijtihad, such as the<br />
mujtahids’ qualifications and institutional hierarchy, and failed to discuss<br />
such seemingly mundane issues as the madrasa curriculum. Nor did it address<br />
the inconsistencies and ambiguities of the Islamic law or question the<br />
rationale behind its archaic categorization.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
Even the establishment of the Safavid state (1501-1736) and declaration of<br />
Shi’ism as its official creed (in obvious contrast to the rival Ottoman empire’s<br />
expressed upholding of “orthodox” Sunni Islam) did not substantially alter<br />
the mujtahids resistance to institution development. This in spite of the<br />
Safavid dynasty’s presumed sacred lineage, its active sponsorship of the<br />
clerical establishment and heavy patronage of the teaching circles. The<br />
immigrant jurists from the Arab Shi’ites communities of Jabal ’Amil (in<br />
today’s Syria and Lebanon), Qatif and Bahrain in northern Arabia and the<br />
Persian Gulf, and Najaf and Hilla in southern Iraq were incorporated into<br />
the judiciary of the Safavid Empire. These mujtahids and their Iranian<br />
counterparts, many being converts from Sunnism, considered the Safavid<br />
shahs as legitimate defenders of the faith and their empire as the guarded<br />
Shi’ite domain. For the “learned” (’ulama) community it was therefore<br />
permissible to assume judicial offices, as majority did, collect alms and the so<br />
called the “share of the Imam,” and even to set the congregational Friday<br />
prayer which considered by majority of Shi’ite jurists as impermissible in the<br />
absence of the Imam of the Age.<br />
The jurists’ reluctance in this period to solidify their gains by implementing<br />
a judicial leadership independent from the state is not surprising. Their<br />
reluctance to better define the boundaries of ijtihad was in part because the<br />
Safavid rulers’ successfully recruited the mujtahids as state functionaries.<br />
Although the office of shaykh al-Islam was held by a high-ranking jurist, this<br />
was not understood to be a legal supervision over the entire judicial<br />
community. Nor did it mean administrative or financial control, a task that<br />
the Safavid state consistently conferred on a non-clerical bureaucrat with the<br />
title of sadr (i.e., the chielf officer). Moreover, the Safavids in the late 17 th<br />
century did not hesitate to patronize the alternative Akhbari school which in<br />
contradistinction to the Usuli school rejected ijtihad and its logical<br />
rationalization. The debate between the two schools in the late 17th and<br />
throughout the 18th centuries weakened the development of usul al-fiqh as a<br />
discretionary methodology and favored instead a wholesale and uncritical<br />
validation of all the hadith as sources of the law. More specifically, all reports<br />
(akhbar) from diverse Shi’ite hadith sources attributed to the Prophet and the<br />
Imams, were considered as authentic, with little discretion for their historical<br />
validity. The Akhbari resistance to independent reasoning was congruent<br />
with the Safavid state’s aversion to allow the emergence of an independent<br />
mujtahid-dominated judiciary.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
After the collapse of the Safavid Empire in 1736 and the ensuing political<br />
instability, Usulism reemerged as the predominant legal school in the late<br />
18th and early 19th century. In the early decades of the 19th century the<br />
Usuli jurists made evident gains in socio-economic and educational areas<br />
hence laying the foundation for a clerical establishment that continued with<br />
little interruption up to the present. They monopolized the madrasas’<br />
education and the pulpit of the mosques, controlled charitable endowments<br />
(awqaf), and posed as the only legitimate recipient of religious taxes. They<br />
developed amicable though somewhat distant relations with the early rulers<br />
of the Qajar dynasty (1785-1925), a mutually beneficial relation that brought<br />
about the golden age of Usuli ijtihad. The growth of religious circles first in<br />
Najaf, where Akhbarism was soundly defeated, and later in the Iranian cities<br />
such as Isfahan and Qum was supported with a large student body and with a<br />
closely-nit network of mater-pupil patronage. Impressive number of legal<br />
works were produced both on the specifics of the law (furu’) and on the usul<br />
al-fiqh with implicit emphasis on the role of the mujtahids not only as legal<br />
scholars but judges and social mediators. The growth of congregations in<br />
mosques also strengthened jurists’ ties with social groups in search of legal<br />
support, most noticeably the merchants of the bazaar who backed the<br />
mujtahids and financed their teaching circles in exchange for legal security<br />
and representation.<br />
Yet with all the success in developing a semi-independent legal network and a<br />
solid lay constituency, the jurists of the Qajar period did not seek to<br />
reconstruct the theory of ijtihad and its application to public law. Despite<br />
occasional “turf wars” with the state over privilege and sphere of influence, or<br />
later in defiance of the state’s Westernizing policies, they continued to honor<br />
the dichotomy of the religious law (shar’), as it concerned the jurists, versus<br />
the customary law (’urf), as exercised by the state. Neither side, the jurists or<br />
the state (at least before the rise of the European-inspired reforms) attempted<br />
to define each of these two spheres of shar’ and ’urf or demarcate their<br />
boundaries by means of codification, let alone to breach the informal<br />
boundaries between them. The usul al-fiqh remained essentially concerned<br />
with its arcane debates on the legal method and legal sources. Voluminous<br />
works, commentaries and glosses on commentaries were produced by the<br />
Usuli scholars on intricate details of semantics and epistemology. Yet the<br />
mujtahids simply did not see the need for a centralized corporate identity or<br />
for disturbing the delicate balance with the state upon which they<br />
continuously negotiated their power. The state in turn preferred ambiguity<br />
whereby through consent and coercion it hoped to persuade the jurists to<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
comply with the state’s otherwise waning power and prestige. By the end of<br />
the century the jurists were more than ever isolated in their world of madrasa<br />
and private courts. Accordingly, the curriculum of the seminaries was<br />
substantially truncated to focus solely on legal studies at the expense of nonreligious<br />
and especially non-legal topics. Even such traditional fields as<br />
mathematics, astronomy, and philosophy were no longer part of the jurists’<br />
general education.<br />
Voices of protest to the jurists’ monopolies and their intellectual petrifaction<br />
further moved the mujtahids toward conservatism and added to their distaste<br />
for new approaches. Most significantly, the messianic Babi movement in the<br />
middle decades of the century questioned the very legitimacy of the clerical<br />
community, its theoretical premises, educational methods, and legal<br />
practices. The Babi religion (later to be transformed into the Baha’i faith)<br />
denied the long-held jurist position that they collectively represent the Imam<br />
of the Age in Occultation. The Babi apocalyptic movement with growing<br />
popularity not only sought leadership in the new “Imam of the Age,” but<br />
declared the end of the historical cycle of Islamic shari’a by ushering a new<br />
cycle of prophetic manifestation. In response to the Babi challenge, the jurists<br />
community closed ranks and came closer to full collaboration with the state<br />
in crushing the Babi revolution. In no other area the jurists heeded the Babi<br />
call for fundamental reform though in longer run the clerical community did<br />
produce a new form of communal leadership. The status of the marja’ that<br />
was first recognized for Shaykh Murtaza Ansari in the late 1850s, not<br />
surprisingly coincided with the growth of the Babi clandestine anti-clerical<br />
subversion. His emergence as the “supreme exemplar” no doubt mirrored the<br />
public desire for a clerical leadership committed to higher standards of<br />
morality, learning, and social justice. Ansari came to represent these values<br />
for a growing constituency of seminarians in the madrasas and among the lay<br />
followers.<br />
The idea of marja'iya as a communal leadership with an increasing claim over<br />
political process continued in the second half of the century and through the<br />
Constitutional Revolution (1906-1911). Perhaps the height of such<br />
politicized marja’iya came with Mirza Hasan Shirazi, the influential jurist and<br />
teacher whose access to funds and his ever-growing teaching circle placed him<br />
ahead of his competitors as the most widely recognized marja’. His general<br />
ban on the use of tobacco during the Regie protest of 1890-91 for the first<br />
time demonstrated the marja’s power against the state and European imperial<br />
monopolies. The channeling of public discontent into political discourse is<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
even more evident during the Constitutional Revolution. Several mujtahids,<br />
simultaneously recognized as marja`s, appealed to diverse constituencies with<br />
contesting political agendas. The breakdown of a united leadership during<br />
this period of political reform and Western-style secular democracy<br />
demonstrated the crucial role of the jurists' followers in promoting the cause<br />
of mujtahids on both sides of the constitutional debate. The greater<br />
polarization of the clergy especially over the issues of secular judiciary and<br />
civil liberties vouched for this multiplicity of leadership. A number of<br />
influential jurists who sided against a Western-style constitution and in favor<br />
of a Shari`a-based alternative were defeated and lost constituency and<br />
prestige, even their lives.<br />
From marja’iya to wilayat-i faqih<br />
ONLY IN THE LATTER PART OF THE 20th century do we witness the gradual<br />
shift back toward a centralized marja’iyya under Ayatollah Husayn Burujirdi.<br />
He should be viewed as the first to hold a united leadership not only in the<br />
management of the Qum seminaries, collection of the religious taxes and<br />
distribution, but a certain degree of legal authority over the clerical<br />
community. It goes without saying that the “emergence” of this form of<br />
centralized marja’iya was a belated, albeit inevitable, response to the state’s<br />
intrusion into the judicial domain. The rise of the Pahlavi secular autocracy<br />
from the middle of the 1920s precipitated the growth of modern educational<br />
institutions. It abolished the mujtahids’ civil courts and replaced them with a<br />
state-controlled judiciary. The state regulating the use of charitable<br />
endowments, and similar measures undermined the ’ulama’s social status and<br />
affected their economic influence. The growth of the secularized or semisecularized<br />
middle classes and popularity of a variety of religious and<br />
ideological challenges, from the Baha’i faith to Marxism and Western-style<br />
modernity, persuaded the demoralized and shrunken clerical community to<br />
try to reorganize the madrasa and to solidify its network at the national level.<br />
Most importantly, the jurists gradually moved away from the state-’ulama<br />
alliance that was founded on the ancient principle of preserving social<br />
equilibrium through guarded collaboration. In due course the new marja’iya<br />
reconstituted its base not only in the bazaar community, where it was<br />
traditionally strong, but among a new class of urban and urbanized poor.<br />
They offered a pool for clerical recruitment and an enthusiastic mosque<br />
congregation.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
Such greater solidarity and group identity however did not result in<br />
reconsideration of the Shi’ite legal thought or any serious attempt to<br />
institutionalize the informal marja’iya leadership. Study of fiqh in the<br />
seminaries of Najaf, Qum and elsewhere remained almost entirely loyal to the<br />
arcane precepts and practices of the Shi’ite law and its obsessive<br />
preoccupation with devotional acts (’ibadat) and contracts (’uqud). The<br />
striking persistence of legal archaism among the Shi’ite jurists can be<br />
explained in part by inherent conservatism of the legal curriculum and in part<br />
by isolation from the society’s new secular discourse. Left out of the new<br />
state-run judiciary, the Shi’ite teaching circles in Najaf and Qum made<br />
almost no attempt to address new issues of public law or even offer a modern<br />
reading of the old legal texts. The so-called hawzas continued to operate<br />
along the informal teacher-pupil patronage and produce growing number of<br />
jurists and/or preachers in need of new congregations.<br />
A number of marja’s that “emerged” after the death of Burujirdi in 1960,<br />
including Ayatollah Khomeini, were no doubt more organized in their<br />
teaching and charitable operations. Yet there was no attempt in the clerical<br />
circles to revisit the nature and conditions of marja’iya, let alone arrive at a<br />
consensus about criteria for such leadership or the hierarchy. As much as the<br />
lay constituency of the marja’as grew and the funding sources improved, no<br />
equivalent of an ecclesiastical hierarchy emerged even though there existed a<br />
fairly coherent network of the ’ulama throughout Iran, southern Iraq and<br />
Lebanon.<br />
The defuse marja’iya leadership of this period relied heavily on both the lay<br />
and the clerical “followers.” To mark their place in a complex game of<br />
prestige and popularity the marja’s depended on their followers for higher<br />
standing. Naturally, at times they were bound by their whims and wishes. As<br />
Mutraza Mutahhari, a prominent follower of Khomeini and a leader of the<br />
future Islamic revolution pointed out in the early 1960’s, in this popularity<br />
contest no marja` could survive without his constituency's financial and<br />
moral backing. In a conference organized by some religious modernists on<br />
the theme of marja’iyat, the largely modernists, among them Mahdi<br />
Bazargan, joined together with a new generation of activist clerics, such as<br />
Mutahhri, to urge the marja’s to bring some order into the notoriously<br />
chaotic world of Shi’i clerical leadership.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
The greater politicization of the clerical community, and especially the<br />
clerical clique around Ayatollah Khomeini from mid-1960s, responded<br />
positively to this call. Among the marja’s of Qum and Najaf, Khomeini<br />
represented the most radical political position. His open anti-Pahlavi<br />
platform caused as much trouble for him as it gained him popularity<br />
especially among the lower and middle rank ’ulama who were disillusioned<br />
with other marja’s and their collaboration with the shah’s regime. Modernity<br />
thus came to the clerical establishment with political radicalization rather<br />
than a fundamental revision of the Shi’ite legal system and reconsideration of<br />
its curriculum and judicial premises. Even prominent students of Khomeini<br />
such as Husain ’Ali Muntazari and Mutaza Mutahhari seldom called for<br />
reconsideration of the Islamic legal tradition or new teaching methods or<br />
adopting a modern legal philosophy. For them legal reform equaled<br />
succumbing to an alien secular modernity introduced by a colonizing and<br />
corrupting West.<br />
Majority of the new seminarians and clerical followers of Khomeini, came<br />
from among the underprivileged in small towns and villages. Increasingly,<br />
they were drawn in to political dissent and political activism in the late 1960s<br />
and ’70s because they resented the wealth and privilege of the secularized<br />
urban middle classes. Equally, they resented and the state’s judiciary for<br />
supplanting the old and decentralized jurists’ courts. They also questioned<br />
subservience of the Pahlavi state. Khomeini and his prominent students<br />
capitalized on these discontents to promote his leadership as superior to other<br />
leaders not necessarily because of Khomeini’s juristic qualifications, which<br />
were meager, but because of his uncompromising political stance.<br />
In the tense environment of confrontation with the shah and his police<br />
apparatus, this message of political dissent was better transmitted to the lay<br />
people by recalling the Shi’ite narratives of defiance and self-sacrifice, as in<br />
the commemoration of the martyrdom of ’Ali and that of his son, Husayn<br />
ibn ’Ali. Laboring over the obscure and mostly redundant details of Shi’ite<br />
law and the theoretical intricacies of usul al-fiqh appeared secondary if not<br />
entirely obsolete. Even Mutahhari, the most promising intellectual product of<br />
Qum in the 1970s preferred to delve into Western philosophy or Islamic<br />
reformism and revolutionary rhetoric rather than adopting a novel approach<br />
in fiqh and usul.<br />
In a climate of state-driven secular modernity versus the ’ulama’s legal<br />
redundancy, Khomeini’s gradual tilt in the 1970s toward the doctrine of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
juridical sovereignty was the solution to the prolonged problem of<br />
unregulated leadership. He borrowed from the Sunni reformist milieu the<br />
notion of the Islamic government, long debated by the likes of Rashid Rida<br />
and later Abul ’Ala Maududi in order to set the legal ground for what he<br />
defined as the “authority of the jurist” (wilayat-i faqih). More a teacher of<br />
Greco-Islamic philosophy than a dabbler in jurisprudence, Khomeini was the<br />
right candidate to break through the inhibiting cobweb of juristic tedium.<br />
His theory had an unmistakable mystico-philosophical core that was colored<br />
by Shi’ite legal trappings. On a personal level it was the work of a reluctant<br />
jurist who was anxious to overcome his marja’ rivals through the<br />
philosophical backdoor of charismatic leadership.<br />
The concept of wilaya upon which Khomeini propounded his theory is a<br />
complex and theologically charged one. Variably read as wilaya (authority,<br />
guardianship) and walaya (patron-client bond of friendship), for Shi’ites it<br />
was the hereditary status primarily arrogated to ’Ali and his Imam<br />
descendants as true successors to the Prophet; a status of sovereignty over his<br />
true believers. In Sufism wilaya implied friendship with God, a saintly status<br />
of proximity to Truth, even according to some on par with prophecy. For<br />
the Shi’ite jurists wilaya was a purely legal term denoting the state of<br />
guardianship often assumed by the jurist over the legal minor (saghir) and<br />
mentally retarded (mahjur), hence wilaya al-faqih. Although in theory the<br />
guardianship of the jurist could be extended to the public sphere, in reality<br />
no jurist of any substance did consider as viable the jurist’s “authority to rule”<br />
(wilaya al-hukm). In the absence of the Occulted Imam, who is the just and<br />
legitimate enforcer of the wilaya, few jurists even condoned the “authority to<br />
judge” (wilaya al-qada) beyond mere issuance of fatwas, but without the<br />
necessary power to enforce them. The notion of “general deputyship” (niyaba<br />
’amma) on behalf of the Imam, as claimed by some jurists in the Safavid and<br />
early Qajar periods, was never extended to the authority to govern, though it<br />
did reserve for the jurist a certain prerogatives, such as declaring jihad under<br />
the auspices of the state.<br />
In the latter part of the 20th century however the prevalence of the idea of<br />
marja’iya seldom allowed the doctrine of collective deputyship of the<br />
mujtahids to be considered. The semantic shift in referring to the jurists also<br />
indicate a change in focus. Khomeini’s use of faqih (jurist), rather than<br />
mujtahid or marja’, in his own articulation of “guardianship” underlined<br />
sheer proficiency in fiqh rather than any acquired clerical status based on<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
vague qualifications. His wilaya, in theory at least, could be extended to any<br />
jurist and not the one that is publicly recognized as the most important<br />
marja’ or even a mujtahid. Such definition no doubt served Khomeini well<br />
while languishing in the exile of Najaf away from his constituency.<br />
As defined by Khomeini, the doctrine of the “guardianship of the jurist” was<br />
applicable to public law as well as civil law. In the absence of the Hidden<br />
Imam, he argued, the jurist presents the least oppressive form of authority<br />
because contrary to temporal rule it is founded on Islamic principles. The<br />
jurist is the most qualified in matters of law, which according to Khomeini is<br />
inherently superior to any secular body of law, and he is obliged by the same<br />
Islamic legal principals to uphold and enforce it. It is therefore incumbent<br />
upon the jurist, as an “individual duty” to strive for acquiring political<br />
authority in order to form the Islamic government. Khomeini’s doctrine was<br />
a revolutionary interpretation of the authority of the jurist even though he<br />
tried hard in his wilayat-i faqih (later Hukumat-i Islami) to fortify his theory<br />
with precedent from classical legal texts and citations from such Usulis jurists<br />
as the 19th century Mulla Ahmad Naraqi. No Shi’ite jurist before him ever<br />
extended the very limited application of legal wilaya to include public affairs,<br />
let alone, assuming of political power.<br />
Legal articulations aside, Khomeini’s doctrine was driven by the requirements<br />
of his constituency. Not only a young generation of his students and<br />
followers defied the legitimacy of the Pahlavi shah, and whatever he stood<br />
for, but they aspired coherence and unanimity within clerical ranks. The<br />
wilayat-i faqih promised not only the ascendancy of the jurists to positions of<br />
political power but a virtual end to clerical resistance to institutionalization.<br />
The rise of the wilayat-i faqih as an institution harbinger the eclipse of the<br />
marja’iya and all the ambiguity that was inherent in qualities of the mujtahid.<br />
Assuming political power by Khomeini and his ’ulama backers, which came<br />
with the revolution of 1979, inevitably imposed a bureaucratic regime on the<br />
Shi’ite ’ulama more rigid than the chaotic madrasa system of Najaf and Qum<br />
ever did. Even the honorary clerical titles, inflated over time, gained new<br />
hierarchical connotation. While ayatollah (a sign of God) applied to the<br />
higher clerical figures, the hujjat al-Islam (a proof of Islam) signified the rank<br />
below. The highest status however was Khomeini’s own. As the “guardian<br />
jurist” (wali-yi faqih) he assumed the title of imam, first time ever used in the<br />
history of Shi’ism in a context other than the twelve Imams. Although the<br />
office of guardian jurist was considered the one and the same as the “deputy<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
of the imam” (na’ib-i imam), more in vogue in the 19th century, in practice a<br />
consensus was reached on the universal and sole reference of the term imam<br />
to the founder of the Islamic Republic, hence “Imam Khomeini.”<br />
The constitutional authority and popular aura that Khomeini acquired as the<br />
guardian jurist, denoted not only a desire for rationalization of the clerical<br />
community but also a drive toward clerical absolutism. The legitimacy and<br />
the mandate of the guardian jurist does not derive from his constituency of<br />
followers, as in the case of the marja’, but from a sublime source. Despite the<br />
seemingly democratic trappings of the constitution of the Islamic Republic,<br />
the guardian jurist is answerable to no source but God, even though he is<br />
appointed by a Council of the Experts (Majlis-i Khubragan), a select body of<br />
high-ranking ’ulama (and presumably impeachable by the same body). The<br />
range of the guardian’s institutional authority is vast and universally abiding<br />
even though the Islamic Consultative Council (Majlis-i Shawra-yi Islami; i.e.,<br />
the parliament) tends to modify his ultimate power. Similarly, articles of the<br />
Constitution guaranteeing the inalienable rights and freedoms of the<br />
individual contradict with the authoritarian power of the guardian jurist.<br />
Khomeini’s charismatic aura in early years of the revolution glossed over the<br />
obvious contradiction in the constitution between democratic freedoms and<br />
the totalitarian power of the guardian jurist. In post-Khomeini era, and<br />
twenty-three years after the revolution, the contrast is glaring. The “supreme<br />
leader” (rahbar) as Khomeini’s successor, Ayatollah ’Ali Khamanei is<br />
recognized in today’s Islamic Republic, insists on these constitutional<br />
prerogatives to control, and if necessary quell, the legislative, the executive<br />
and the judicial branches of the government and remain unaccountable to<br />
any elected body.<br />
The authoritarian nature of wilayat-i faqih is indebted to the persistent<br />
culture of autocracy which the revolution denounced in theory but<br />
perpetuated in practice. But it also was reflective of the Shi’ite judicial<br />
community’s failure to rethink the precepts of the Shi’ite law and their<br />
applicability to pluralist values. The doctrine of the “guardianship of the<br />
jurist” was informed above all by a Shi’ite legal mindset that essentially was<br />
alien to the modern notions of plurality and democratic leadership even<br />
though, ironically, Shi’ite ijtihad and marja’iya operated on some form of<br />
popular representation. It was also colored, no doubt, by Khomeini’s own<br />
mystical propensity for classical Sufism and specifically Ibn ’Arabi’s theory of<br />
wilaya. Moreover, what historically informed “guardianship,” as apparent in<br />
the rhetoric of the Islamic revolution, was an imagined narrative of Islam’s<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
golden age. The modern Shi’ite narrative of ’Ali’s pristine (though historically<br />
doomed) caliphate placed great moral emphasis on leadership qualities of<br />
compassion (walaya) and self-denial (ithar) essential for creating a “classless”<br />
society. Added to the admixture that concocted the “guardianship of the<br />
jurist” also was the modern revolutionary urgency for assertive leadership<br />
harking back to the French age of “terror” and the Russian “dictatorship of<br />
the proletariat.” Such presuppositions were barely conducive to a progressive<br />
legal framework that separates legal authority from political power and<br />
religion from the state. What profoundly was missing in this politico-legal<br />
vision of absolute leadership was a desire for re-examining the long-held<br />
precepts of Islamic law in a new light of historical relativity.<br />
As for the clerical community, in the two decades since the Islamic revolution<br />
it has allowed itself to be largely incorporated into the Islamic regime and<br />
actively sought to monopolize positions of power. A minority of the jurists<br />
remained critical of the theory and the implementation of leadership and<br />
faced the dire consequences of their criticisms. The rising opposition to<br />
wilayat-i faqih on the other hand unified the pro-regime clerics behind the<br />
doctrine and solidified the clerical hierarchy to an unprecedented degree. The<br />
Shi’ite establishment more than ever appears to be an equivalent of a statesponsored<br />
church with its ecclesiastical hierarchy, perhaps, as Said Arjomand<br />
observed, comparable to the Weberian “cesaro-papist” model of the state.<br />
The concentration of power in the hand of an oligarchy consisting of the<br />
guardian jurist and his top echelons of clerical allies, inevitably triggered<br />
much resentment. The laymen and laywomen of younger generation with<br />
revolutionary credentials now feel they have been left out by a clerical<br />
establishment that resorts to repression to preserve its privileges and<br />
monopolies.<br />
The anti-clerical content of Aghajari’s speech and his call for an Islamic<br />
Reformation originates in this pool of anti-clerical resentment. Younger<br />
Iranians are frustrated with the monopoly of power, heavy-handed treatment<br />
of dissident voices, and obscurantist legal outlook. They also are disillusioned<br />
with repeated setbacks of the seemingly pro-reform wing of the clerical<br />
establishment as represented by President Muhammad Khatami and his<br />
moderate clerical supporters. Such calls for reforming Islam are by no means<br />
rare in the history of antinomean Islam. Yet what distinguishes this postrevolutionary<br />
episode from earlier examples is that this movement of protest,<br />
especially since Khomeini’s death in 1989, aimed at a consolidated clerical<br />
hierarchy with claim to infallible and comprehensive authority. The<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Abbas Amanat<br />
guardianship of jurist is a far more explicit a claim over religious hegemony in<br />
public sphere and on behalf of the Imams than the old marja’iya ever was.<br />
This is what makes the new criticism especially potent and enduring.<br />
As for Aghajari’s fate, he seems to have been the involuntary beneficiary of<br />
the inconsistencies that are typical of Shi`ite legal practice. The same ruling<br />
of the <strong>Hamad</strong>an court that sentenced him to death for blasphemy also<br />
sentenced him to a total of eight years of imprisonment for three other<br />
related counts and after that to ten years of ban from teaching in any<br />
university. The court does not clarify whether the death sentence should be<br />
carried before or after eighteen years of incarceration and banishment from<br />
classroom. The seemingly ludicrous verdict of the court points to the<br />
ambiguities of a legal culture built on negotiation and compromise, a culture<br />
that still seems to be thriving more that two decades of Islamic<br />
revolutionizing.<br />
Notes<br />
1 Aqajari: Matn-i kamel-i sokhanrani-yi <strong>Hamad</strong>an, etc. (Tehran, 1382/2003),<br />
p. 36.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
P<br />
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
A Mills Revival?<br />
by<br />
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Prologue<br />
erhaps you know Foucault’s remark that despite the torrent of criticism<br />
directed against his philosophical system, “Hegel prowls through the<br />
twentieth century.” Consigned to a kind of academic purgatory for the last<br />
three decades of the twentieth century, at a time when social theory had<br />
migrated from the social sciences obsessed with case studies and social<br />
“problems” to literature and philosophy where he was rarely discussed and<br />
almost never cited., C. Wright Mills was an absent presence. All sociologists,<br />
and most people in other social scientific disciplines knew his name, and in<br />
their political unconscious, recognized his salience, but were deterred by fear<br />
and careerism from following his path as a public political intellectual. Yet in<br />
the wake of scandals involving leading corporations and their Chief Executive<br />
and Financial Officers, which have become daily fare even in mainstream<br />
media, and the hegemony of corporate capital over the American state, which<br />
was widely reported in the press and television with unembarrassed<br />
approbation, Mills’s work is experiencing a small but pronounced revival.<br />
Although his name rarely appears on the reading lists of fashionable graduate<br />
courses in social and cultural theory, the republication of four of his major<br />
books, with new introductions by the historian Nelson Lichtenstein (New<br />
Men of Power), the social critic Russell Jacoby (White Collar) political theorist<br />
Alan Wolfe (The Power Elite), and sociologist Todd Gitlin (The Sociological<br />
Imagination) is likely to aid in exposing his work to students and younger<br />
faculty.<br />
For some, Mills does not qualify in this era when social and cultural theory is<br />
dominated by European influences. Except for his dissertation Sociology and<br />
Pragmatism, he rarely engaged in philosophical speculation; more to the point<br />
apart from some essays, in only one major instance, Character and Social<br />
Structure, did he address the “meta” questions such as method or the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
underlying presuppositions of theorizing. Marxists criticize the lack, even<br />
disdain of “class analysis” in his work; indeed the commentaries in his<br />
collection of annotated readings, The Marxists constitute both an appreciation<br />
and an unsystematic critique of Marx and Marxism. And social historians,<br />
most of them informed by class and class struggle, object to his focus on the<br />
study of élites rather than popular expressions from below, even within social<br />
movements.<br />
Yet Mills remains a model for those who wish to become intellectuals: by the<br />
evidence of his massive output in the twenty-three years of publications he was<br />
the antithesis of the specialist or the expert. When most in the human sciences<br />
followed the path of least resistance by writing the same articles and books<br />
over and over, Mills ranged widely over historical cultural, political, social, and<br />
psychological domains. He was interested in the labor and radical movements<br />
and wrote extensively on them; as a close student of Max Weber he made<br />
some of the most trenchant critiques of bureaucracy; he was among the leading<br />
post-war critics of the emergent mass culture and the mass communications<br />
media and, despite its ostensibly introductory tone, The Sociological<br />
Imagination may be America’s best contribution to the ongoing debate about<br />
the relationship of scholarship to social commitment, a debate which has<br />
animated literary as well as social science circles for decades.<br />
His literary executor and biographer, Irving Louis Horowitz, turned against<br />
him, for the most part, so the biography tells us more about the author than<br />
about Mills. Other book-length treatments are sympathetic but limited, and<br />
to a large extent, dated. With the partial exception of some excellent<br />
dissertations and master’s theses, notably Tom Hayden’s insightful Radical<br />
Nomad more than forty years after his death, Mills awaits a major critical<br />
study, let alone a full-length biography.<br />
We may speculate that among putative readers his contemporanity, the sharp<br />
focus on the United States and its traditions and, most of all, his annoying<br />
habit of writing plainly (substituting vernacular expressions for scientific terms)<br />
turned away some who can only respect writers who invent neologisms and<br />
whose simple thoughts require complex syntax. But at a moment when these<br />
fashions have lost some of their luster, those who yearn for substance as well as<br />
style may return with pleasure to the dark ruminations of C. Wright Mills.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003<br />
I<br />
C. Wright Mills is exemplary of a vanishing breed in American life: the public<br />
political intellectual who, despite his grating message, often received a hearing<br />
in mainstream media. For almost fifteen years, beginning with the publication<br />
of The New Men of Power in 1948 and ending with his untimely death, at age<br />
forty six, in 1962, Mills was among America’s best known social scientists and<br />
social critics. During the late 1940s and 1950s he published three books that<br />
constitute a theory and description of the post-World War II American social<br />
structure. His Sociological Imagination remains widely read in college<br />
classrooms, both for its attempt to provide a socially-committed introduction<br />
to the discipline, and its fierce critique of the prevailing tendencies in American<br />
sociology, what Mills calls “Grand Theory” and “Abstracted Empiricism.” The<br />
grand theorist’s scope is much too wide to yield practical and theoretical<br />
insight. And Mills criticizes the legions of Abstracted Empiricists who, in the<br />
service of incrementally accumulated verifiable scientific knowledge, confine<br />
themselves to producing small-scale investigations. Together with his<br />
collaborator and mentor, Hans Gerth, he edited one of the earliest and best<br />
collections in English translation of Max Weber’s essays. And Character and<br />
Social Structure (1954), written with Gerth, an unjustly neglected work, may<br />
be considered Mills’s premier work of social theory. This book elaborates what<br />
I claim was the “scaffolding” upon which he hung his major works of middle<br />
range theory, especially the triology. In fact, it is difficult to fully comprehend<br />
the harsh critiques of Sociological Imagination, and Mills’s method, without the<br />
elaborated theoretical framework of Character.<br />
While not exactly a household name, he was widely known among the<br />
politically active population and wide circles of academic and independent<br />
intellectuals. Unlike many public intellectuals he was neither a servant nor a<br />
supplicant of power but, in the sense of the 17th century English radical, was a<br />
“ranter”; in American terms, he was a Paul Revere whose job it was to sound<br />
the alarm. Indeed, some of his writings recall the pamphlets of the decades of<br />
the American revolution where the address of numerous and often anonymous<br />
writers was to the “publick” of small farmers and artisans, as much as to those<br />
holding political and economic power. Much of his later writing may be
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
compared to turn of the 20th century populist and socialist pamphleteers<br />
whose aim was to simultaneously educate and arouse workers and farmers to<br />
the evils of corporate power.<br />
Yet in his most fertile period of intellectual work, the decade and a half ending<br />
with the publication of The Sociological Imagination (1959), with the possible<br />
exception of The Power Elite, Mills hardly expected to reach a popular, let<br />
alone mass public. Nevertheless, he always attempted to reach out to a wider<br />
public than did his fellow academics, even when he was formulating new<br />
theories, let alone engaging in public criticism. But Mills’s intention is entirely<br />
subversive of contemporary mainstream social science, especially the notion<br />
that intellectuals should remain neutral observers of economic, political and<br />
social life. While he performed his fair share of funded research—notably his<br />
study of Puerto Rico and the collective portraits of characteristic social types—<br />
most of his writing is addressed to potential and actual political publics.<br />
Following Marx and Weber, who at the end of his life was a major contributor<br />
in shaping the moral and legal framework of the Weimar Republic, Mills held<br />
that intellectuals and their ideas were embedded in the social antagonisms and<br />
struggles of their own time; they bring to their analysis a definite standpoint,<br />
whether or not they are prepared to acknowledge it.<br />
Yet Mills adhered to none of the mainstream parties nor to those on the<br />
fringes of mainstream politics. While he was a figure of his own time (his main<br />
work was done in the 1940s and 1950s, when issues of sex, gender and ecology<br />
were barely blips on the screen), his position was congenitally critical—of the<br />
right, conservatives, liberals, the relatively tiny parties of the left and especially<br />
members of his own shrinking group, the independent leftists. Like one of his<br />
heroes, the economist and social theorist Thorstein Veblen, himself a pariah in<br />
his chosen discipline, to paraphrase a famous aphorism of Marx, Mills was “in<br />
but not of” the academy insofar as he refuses the distinction between<br />
scholarship and partisanship. But, unlike Veblen, whose alienation from<br />
conventional economics was almost total, Mills was, for most of his<br />
professional career, a sociologist in his heart as much as his mind The rhetoric<br />
and the methods embodied in his books on American social structure—The<br />
New Men of Power, White Collar, and The Power Elite—are firmly rooted in<br />
the perspectives of mainstream American sociology at the end of the war.<br />
These perspectives owed as much to the methodological precepts of Emile<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Durkheim as they did to the critical theory of Karl Marx and Max Weber.<br />
Using many of the tools of conventional social inquiry: surveys, interviews,<br />
data analysis—charts included—Mills takes pains to stay close to the “data”<br />
until the concluding chapters.<br />
But what distinguishes Mills from mainstream sociology, and from Weber,<br />
with whom he shares a considerable portion of his intellectual outlook, is the<br />
standpoint of radical social change, not of fashionable sociological neutrality.<br />
At the height of the Cold War and in the midst of the so-called McCarthy era,<br />
he fearlessly named capitalism as the system of domination from within one of<br />
its intellectual bastions, Columbia University, and distanced himself from exradicals<br />
among his colleagues who were busy “choosing the west,” otherwise<br />
giving aid and comfort to the witch-hunters, or neutering themselves by hiding<br />
behind the ideology of value-free scholarship. Anti-Stalinist to the core, toward<br />
the end of his life he was, nevertheless, accused of pro-Communist sympathies<br />
for his unsparing criticism of the militarization of America and his spirited<br />
defense of the Cuban revolution.<br />
In the light of his later writings which, to say the least, held out little hope for<br />
radical social change in the United States The New Men of Power, Mills’s first<br />
major work, occupies a singular place in the Mills corpus. Written on the heels<br />
of the veritable general strike of industrial workers in 1946, and the<br />
conservative counterattack the following year embedded in the Taft-Hartley<br />
amendments to the Labor Relations Act, the study of America’s labor leaders<br />
argues that for the first time in history the labor movement, having shown its<br />
capacity to shape the political economy, possessed the practical requisites to<br />
become a major actor in American politics as well. But as both “as army<br />
general and a contractor of labor,” a “machine politician” and the head of a<br />
“social movement,” the labor leader occupies contradictory space. (Mills,<br />
1948) By 1948, the year of publication of the first edition of The New Men of<br />
Power, buoyed by American capitalism’s unparalleled global dominance, a<br />
powerful conservative force was arrayed against labor’s recently acquired power<br />
and, according to Mills, had no intention of yielding more ground without an<br />
all-out industrial and political war. Yet, he found union leaders curiously<br />
unprepared for the struggle. Even as their cause was being abandoned by liberal<br />
allies, and belittled and besmirched by their natural enemies among the<br />
corporations and their ideological mouthpieces, right-wing intellectuals and<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
conservative politicians, union leaders remained faithful to the Democratic<br />
party and to the New Deal, which was rapidly fading into history. Mills and<br />
his collaborator, Helen Schneider, found that the concept that working people<br />
needed a labor party to truly represent their political interests had declined<br />
from the perspective of most labor leaders whereas a decade earlier, the apex of<br />
industrial unionism, a majority favored the formation of such a party, despite<br />
their expedient support of the Democrats.<br />
You might say that Mills’s notion of power owes much to Machiavelli’s The<br />
Prince. Just as Machiavelli reminds the prince that the old rules of the feudal<br />
oligarchy no longer suffice to retain power but that a public has formed which<br />
intends to call the ruler to account for his actions, in his book on the labor<br />
leaders Mills is, at first, in dialogue with a leadership increasingly attracted to<br />
oligarchical rule, and to the liberal center and whose love affair with established<br />
power has lasted to this day. His study admonishes the labor leadership to<br />
attend to the post-war shift that endangers theirs and their members’ power.<br />
Arguing that the “main drift” is away from the collaboration between business<br />
and labor made necessary and viable by the war he suggests that labor leaders of<br />
“great stature” must come to the fore before labor is reduced. “Now there is no<br />
war,” but there is a powerful war machine and conservative reaction against<br />
labor’s power at the bargaining table.<br />
“Today, knit together as they are by trade associations, the corporations<br />
steadily translate economic strength into effective and united political power.<br />
The power of the federal state has increased enormously. The state is now so<br />
big in the economy, and the power of business is so great in the state, that<br />
unions can no longer seriously expect even the traditional short-run economic<br />
gains without considering the conditions under which their demands are<br />
politically realizable.” Top down rule, which implies keeping the membership<br />
at bay is, according to Mills, inadequate to the new situation where a militaryindustrial<br />
alliance was emerging, among whose aims was to weaken and<br />
otherwise destroy the labor movement.<br />
How to combat this drift? Mills forthrightly suggests that the labor leader<br />
become the basis for the formation of a “new power bloc.” Rather than make<br />
deals on the top with powerful interests, “he will have to accumulate power<br />
from the bottom. . . . If the democratic power of members is to be used<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
against the concentrated power of money, it must in some way create its own<br />
political force . . . the left would create an independent labor party” based on<br />
labor’s formidable economic strength. At the same time, Mills argues, it must<br />
enlarge its own base to include the “underdogs”—few of whom are in the<br />
unions. By underdogs Mills does not mean those at the very bottom. They<br />
are, in his view, too habituated to “submission.” He means the working poor,<br />
the unskilled who were largely left out of the great organizing wave of the<br />
1930s and the war years. And he calls for the organization of elements of the<br />
new middle class and the rapidly growing white collar strata whose potential<br />
power, he argues, will remain unrealized unless they are organized.<br />
One may read the New Men of Power with a number of pairs of eyes. At<br />
minimum it can be read as a stimulating account of the problems and<br />
prospects facing post-World War II American labor. It is descriptively<br />
comprehensive of the state of organized labor and the obstacles which it faced<br />
in this period. If Mills was mistaken to believe that unions would have to<br />
become an independent political force to meet the elementary economic<br />
demands of their memberships, it may be argued that this limitation applies<br />
only to the first three decades after the war. Unions did deliver, and in some<br />
cases handsomely, to a substantial minority of the American working class.<br />
They organized neither the “underdogs” nor the new middle class and white<br />
collar clerical, technical and professional workers who were all but ignored by<br />
the postwar labor movement, but forged a new social compact with large<br />
employers for their own members. For a third of the labor force in unions,<br />
and a much larger percentage of industrial workers, they succeeded in<br />
negotiating what may be called a “private” welfare state, huge advances in their<br />
members’ standard of living and a high degree of job security and individual<br />
protection against arbitrary discharge and other forms of discipline.<br />
Ironically, this book is far more accurate in its central prognostication of<br />
labor’s decline for the years since 1973. Labor has paid a steep price for its<br />
refusal to heed Mills’s admonition to forge its own power bloc. Buffeted by<br />
economic globalization, corporate mergers and the deindustrialization of vast<br />
areas of the northeast and midwest and by the growth of the largely non-union<br />
south as the industrial investment of choice, many unions have despaired of<br />
making new gains and are hanging on to their declining memberships for dear<br />
life. Labor is, perhaps irreversibly, on the defensive. In this period, union<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
density—the proportion of union members to the work force—has been cut<br />
in half. Collective bargaining stills occurs regularly in unionized industries and<br />
occupations and employers still sign contracts. But the last two decades are<br />
marked by labor’s steady retreat from hard-won gains. In many instances,<br />
collective bargaining as yielded to collective begging.<br />
Corporations and their political allies have succeeded in rolling back one of the<br />
most important features of the New Deal-era reforms, the provision of a<br />
minimum income for the long-term unemployed (pejoratively coded as<br />
“welfare” by post-New Deal politicians). Many who still collect checks are<br />
forced to work in public and private agencies for minimum wages, in some<br />
states replacing union labor. Social Security is on the block and privatization of<br />
public goods, especially schools and health care facilities, seems to be the longterm<br />
program of conservatives and many in the liberal center.<br />
Mills recognizes, as few labor leaders do, the importance of reaching out to the<br />
various publics that frame the political landscape. During the era of the social<br />
compact, union leaders saw little value in taking labor’s case to the public<br />
either during strikes or important legislative campaigns. As junior partners of<br />
the power élite they were often advised to keep conflicts in the “family” and<br />
rely on lobbying, influence with leading politicians through electoral support,<br />
and other traditionally élite tactics to achieve their goals. Labor leaders would<br />
rarely divulge the issues in union negotiations and during the final stages of<br />
bargaining because they agreed to a press blackout. Only as an act of<br />
desperation, when an organizing drive or a strike was in its losing stage, did<br />
some unions make public statements. Following Mills’s advice, one might<br />
argue, especially for public employees unions and unions in major national<br />
corporations, the public is always the third party at the bargaining table and the<br />
struggle to win it over has generally be won by management.<br />
The ambiguity comes in when the subsequent writings are considered.<br />
Discouraged by the labor movement’s inability to reverse or halt the<br />
reactionary legislative and political offensive, by the early 1950s Mills had<br />
abandoned hope that the labor movement was capable of stemming the tide of<br />
almost complete corporate capitalist domination of economic, political and<br />
cultural life. Discussion of the labor movement’s social weight is largely absent<br />
from White Collar, published in 1951, only three years after The New Men of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Power. The Power Elite, which appeared in 1956, more or less permanently<br />
consigns organized labor to a subordinate status within the pantheon of<br />
national power. In Mills’s view the moment had come and gone when unions<br />
could even conceive of making a qualitative difference in power arrangements.<br />
Whereas in 1948, Mills’s address was chiefly to the labor leaders themselves—<br />
it was both a careful sociological portrait of these new men of power and an<br />
attempted dialogue with them—the subsequent works do not have a specific<br />
labor public in mind.<br />
It was the theory of mass society, a concept that spans radical and conservative<br />
critiques of late capitalism, that informed Mills’s later pessimism. Mills was a<br />
leading figure in the sociology of “mass” culture and mass society which<br />
developed along several highly visible lines in the 1940s and 1950s. He<br />
observed the increasing homogenization of American culture and brilliantly<br />
linked some of its more egregious features to the decline of the democratic<br />
public. While his rhetoric was distinctly in the American vein, his views<br />
paralleled, and were crucially influenced by, those of Theodore Adorno, Max<br />
Horkheimer and Herbert Marcuse, the leading theorists of the Frankfurt<br />
school. While there is little evidence that he was similarly impressed by<br />
psychoanalysis, like them he linked cultural massification to mounting<br />
political conformity associated with the emergence of fascism and other<br />
authoritarian movements in nearly all advanced industrial societies.<br />
This pioneering study of the emergence of the middle class of salaried<br />
professional, technical and clerical employees situates the spread of mass culture<br />
after World War I to their growing significance in advanced industrial societies.<br />
Consistent with his emerging obsession with questions of political and social<br />
power and of the prospects for radical social transformation, White Collar may<br />
be read as an assessment not only of the occupational situation of the various<br />
strata of the middle class in the manner of traditional sociological analysis, but<br />
of the social psychology of what Mills terms the “new” middle class—the<br />
rapidly growing strata of salaried professional, technical and administrative<br />
employees—many of them working in large corporations. The book opens<br />
with an obituary of the “old” middle class—farmers, small merchants and<br />
manufacturers—perhaps the leading class of the 18th and first half of 19th<br />
century. The transformation of property from a welter of small independent<br />
producers and merchants to large concentrations of capital which marked the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
second half of the 19th century reduced the economic and political influence<br />
of the old middle class to the middle levels of power, mostly in local<br />
communities. The functions of administration, sales and distribution grew<br />
faster than manufacturing, but even in production industries the traditional<br />
blue collar industrial work force expanded more slowly than the bureaucracies<br />
of the various strata of white collar employees.<br />
By World War I, the oligopolistic corporations in basic industries such as steel<br />
and energy, and large light-manufacturing industries such as textiles and<br />
durable consumer goods, banking and insurance, and wholesaling and retail<br />
enterprises, were hiring huge armies of clerical employees and sales personnel,<br />
and smaller but important coteries of engineers, technicians and managers, the<br />
latter growing numerically with the decline of the family owned and operated<br />
firm. To be sure the small firm has survived, according to Mills, but small<br />
business of all types is increasingly unstable:<br />
Nationally, the small businessman is overpowered, politically<br />
and economically, by big business; he therefore tries to ride<br />
with and benefit from the success of big business on the<br />
national political front, even as he fights the economic effects<br />
of big business on the local and state front. (Mills 1951, 51)<br />
Small entrepreneurs go in and out of business, their chance of survival<br />
diminishing with the growth and scope of large scale enterprises: grocery<br />
chains, department stores and large manufacturing corporations all of which<br />
are able to benefit from economies of scale and ample supplies of capital with<br />
which to invest in technological innovation to drive prices down and their<br />
small business competitors out of the marketplace.<br />
Among the diverse strata of the new middle class the managers, according to<br />
Mills, occupy a unique place. The “managerial demiurge” signifies a new form<br />
of power, and not only at the workplace. Their numbers are growing rapidly<br />
and, to the degree they run corporate and government bureaucracies, “the<br />
managerial type of man becomes more important in the total social structure.”<br />
(Mills 1951, 77) While the top managers are given the task of controlling the<br />
underlying population, at every level of economic, political and cultural<br />
activity—middle managers, supervisors and line foreman, as well—the job of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
coordination and of control expands with the complexity of the occupational<br />
structure and the manifold problems associated with advanced capitalism.<br />
Mills accepts the idea, first advanced by Berle and Means in the classic Modern<br />
Corporation and Private Property, that advanced capitalist societies are marked<br />
by the separation of ownership and control in the everyday functions of the<br />
large corporate enterprise, the owner has gradually handed more power to the<br />
manager. In turn, government and private corporations are run as rationalized<br />
bureaucracies rather than in the image of the individual corporate tycoon of the<br />
late 19th century who ran his business like an old fashioned sovereign.<br />
Although little more than elevated wage workers and, for this reason, deprived<br />
by their subordination to management, of the work autonomy enjoyed by the<br />
“old” middle class, the salaried professional and technical strata remain<br />
culturally tied to capital. Mills saw little hope for their unionization as long as<br />
mass culture—their indigenous culture—was the “the main drift” of mass<br />
society. On the one hand, reared in images of American exceptionalism, they<br />
were the embodiments of the cultural aspiration for individual social mobility;<br />
on the other, their growth was accompanied by the proletarianization of<br />
professional and technical strata, proletarian because they neither owned their<br />
own productive property nor controlled their labor. Some may earn higher<br />
salaries than industrial workers but, in contrast to unionized workers who have<br />
the protection of a collective bargaining agreement limiting management’s<br />
rights, they were subordinated to arbitrary managerial authority in the<br />
performance of their tasks. Yet, their eyes were fixed on the stars. Lacking a<br />
secure class identity which is intrinsic to those engaged in the production and<br />
appropriation of things, as producers of “symbols” they were likely to remain<br />
an atomized mass, an oxymoron which signified what Erik Olin Wright later<br />
described as the “contradictory class location” into which they were thrust. As<br />
for the clerical and administrative employees they were cogs in the vast<br />
machinery of the “enormous file”; they were keepers of information and of the<br />
proliferating records accumulated by the growing significance of sales. (Mills<br />
1951 189-214)<br />
In the absence of social movements capable of making a genuine difference in<br />
power relations, these studies are directed to the general, largely “liberal center”<br />
for whom Mills never ceased to have mixed feelings. The liberals were a<br />
necessary ingredient of any possible grand coalition for social change, but this<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
center was marked by “looseness of its ideas,” an attribute which led it to<br />
“dissipate their political attention and activity.” Yet, in the wake of the failure<br />
of the labor leaders to face the challenge posed by the rightward drift of<br />
American politics, the hardening of corporate resistance to labor’s economic<br />
demands, the freezing of the political environment by the cold war and the<br />
virtual disappearance of the left, especially the independent left, until the late<br />
1950s Mills’s public address shifted decisively to the center, even as his<br />
political position remained firmly on the independent, non-communist left.<br />
The central category which suffuses Mills’ social thought and to which he<br />
returned again and again was that of power, especially the mechanisms by<br />
which it is achieved and retained by élites in the economy and social<br />
institutions. This is the signal contribution of the Italian social theorists<br />
Gaetano Mosca and Vilfredo Pareto to Mills’s conceptual arsenal. In Pareto’s<br />
conception, élites, not classes, constitute the nexus of social rule. To derive his<br />
conception of power, Mills focuses neither on the labor process, the starting<br />
point for Marxists, nor on the market, the economic focus for Weberians. In<br />
contrast, Mills is a state theorist: élites are, for Mills, always institutionally<br />
constituted. He recognized the relative autonomy of corporations but<br />
consistent with the regulation era of advanced capitalism, he argued that the<br />
state had become the fundamental location of the exercise of economic, as<br />
much as political power. So, for example, in The Power Elite, his most famous<br />
and influential work, three “institutional orders” which are closely linked but<br />
spatially and historically independent—the corporate, the political and the<br />
military—constitute together what others might, in Marxist vocabulary,<br />
describe as a ruling class. Except it isn’t a “class” either in the sense of those<br />
who share a common relationship to the ownership and control of productive<br />
property or, as in Max Weber’s conception, groups that share a common<br />
interest in gaining access to market opportunities for employment and to<br />
acquire goods. The power élite is an alliance of the individuals who compose<br />
top layers of each of the crucial institutional orders and whose relative strength<br />
varies according to historical circumstances.<br />
In the immediate post-World War II period, Mills detects the autonomous<br />
power of the military as, increasingly, the driving force in the alliance, just as<br />
the political élite occupied that position during the 1930s slump, when the<br />
provision of social welfare attained an urgency, lest by neglecting the needs of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
the underlying population, the system might be endangered. The military, as a<br />
relatively autonomous power center, gained sustenance from the rearmament<br />
program leading to World War II but since there was no peace after 1945, it<br />
retained its central position in the power structure. Almost immediately the<br />
United States and the Soviet Union, the two remaining superpowers, were<br />
engaged in a new “cold” war in which nuclear and conventional weapons<br />
played an enormous economic as well as political role in world and domestic<br />
politics. And the cold aspects of the war were punctuated by discontinuous,<br />
but frequent, “hot” wars such as those in Korea, Southeast Asia, China, and<br />
Israel. Under these circumstances, the military, allying itself with those large<br />
corporations engaged in defense production, accumulated substantial<br />
independent power. Needless to say, the corporations, the holders of what he<br />
calls “big money,” are by no means ignored. After all, they remain the<br />
backbone of the entire system.<br />
But in his analysis of the commanding heights, Mills is not content to describe<br />
the three institutional orders that comprise the power élite. He shows that the<br />
scope of its power embraces wide sections upon which the legitimacy of<br />
American society depends. Chief among them are the celebrities who, as the<br />
premier ornaments of mass society, are routinely recruited to lend prestige to<br />
the high officials of the three principal institutions of power. Political parties<br />
and their candidates eagerly showcase celebrities who support them; corporate<br />
executives regularly mingle with celebrities in Hollywood and New York at<br />
exclusive clubs and parties; and “warlords”—high military officers, corporate<br />
officials, their scientists and technologists engaged in perfecting more lethal<br />
weapons of mass destruction, the politicians responsible for executive and<br />
congressional approval of military budgets—congregate in many of the same<br />
social and cultural spaces as well as in the business suites of warfare. In short,<br />
following the muckraking tradition, but also international sociological<br />
discourse on power, The Power Elite uses the evidentiary method first<br />
perfected by the independent scholars such as Ferdinand Lundberg of tracing<br />
interlocking networks of social and cultural association as much as business<br />
relationship to establish the boundaries and contour of power. Moreover, in<br />
this work we can see the movement of individuals among the leading<br />
institutional orders that constitute the nexus of power, so that their difference<br />
tends to blur.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Naming the power élite as the only “independent variable” in American<br />
society, Mills was obliged to revise his earlier estimation of the labor<br />
movement. Barely eight years after designating the labor leaders “new men of<br />
power” who had to choose whether to lead the entire society in the name of<br />
working people and other subordinate groups he designated them a<br />
“dependent variable” in the political economy. Accordingly, he lost hope that,<br />
in any possible practical eventuality, working people and their unions would<br />
enter the historical stage as autonomous actors, at least until a powerful new<br />
left of intellectuals and other oppressed groups emerged to push them.<br />
Mills’s identification of power with the triumvirate of corporation, military<br />
and national state, was offered in the same period that political theorists and<br />
sociologists were proclaiming the concept of pluralism as a more accurate<br />
description. Robert Dahl’s Who Governs, a study of the city of New Haven’s<br />
power structure, construed power in the metaphor of a parallelogram of forces,<br />
none of which dominated political decision-making. Business, labor, consumer<br />
groups such as parent associations, taxpayers and other organized groups<br />
constituted power relationships through the mechanisms of compromise and<br />
consensus. Although not denying that big business and the political directorate<br />
exhibited oligarchic tendencies, Dahl vehemently refuted the concepts<br />
associated with both Marxism and élite theory that there were clearly<br />
articulated ruling groups that were the only genuine independent force. Dahl’s<br />
study became not only a model for the understanding of local power, but of<br />
national power as well. As persuasive as Mills’s argument may have been for<br />
progressives and other political skeptics, his views were subject to the severe<br />
criticism of many of his fellow academics as well as reviewers. For some he had<br />
failed to appreciate the resilience of American democracy, was importing ideas<br />
inherited from the non-applicable European context to American<br />
circumstances and, in any case, had offered yet another exercise in debunking.<br />
II<br />
HE DID HIS GRADUATE WORK AT Wisconsin under the mentorship of, among<br />
others, Hans Gerth, whose powerful mind was never matched by a body of<br />
equally compelling written work. In some respects, Mills gave an English<br />
language voice to Gerth’s ideas (although the collaboration has lately been<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
subject to critical scrutiny by some scholars who contend that Mills took<br />
advantage of Gerth). These ideas—a complex synthesis of Marx, Max Weber,<br />
Gaetano Mosca and Vilfedo Pareto—introduced a wide range of concepts into<br />
the study of modern institutional life. Crucial to Gerth and Mills’s<br />
understanding of how modern institutions work was Weber’s theory of<br />
bureaucracy, read through the pejorative connotation of its system of rules and<br />
occupational hierarchies as inimical to democratic decision-making. Rather<br />
than viewing bureaucracies as necessary institutions to make complex industrial<br />
societies work more efficiently as Weber argued, Gerth also provided Mills<br />
with the idea that bureaucratic control of institutions entailed domination,<br />
which Robert Michels extended to socialist organizations in his classic, Political<br />
Parties. For Michels the mechanism of domination was the leadership’s<br />
monopoly over the means of communication. Mills sees the development of<br />
the state, no less than the labor movement as a series of highly institutionalized<br />
bureaucracies which, in contrast to his preferred model of unions—voluntary,<br />
democratically run and rank and file controlled organizations—were rapidly<br />
mutating into oligarchies of power.<br />
Mills’s dissertation, Sociology and Pragmatism, completed in 1943, was an<br />
explicit attempt to draw the implications of European sociological theory for<br />
the United States. He himself exemplified that connection. For pragmatism<br />
there is no question of intrinsic “truth” if by that term we designate the<br />
possibility that truth may be independent of the context within which a<br />
proposition about the social world is uttered. The truth of a proposition is<br />
closely tied to the practical consequences that might, under specific conditions,<br />
issue from it. And practical consequences may be evaluated only from the<br />
perspective of social interest. But, unlike John Dewey’s concept, there is no<br />
“win-win” thinking here. In the end, Mills adhered to the notion that whether<br />
a particular power arrangement was desirable depended on whose ox was being<br />
gored.<br />
Mills drew heavily upon Karl Mannheim’s concept of ideology, but also<br />
adopted his lifelong preoccupation with the intellectuals whom Mannheim<br />
designated as the only social formation capable of independent thought and<br />
action.. Mannheim’s major work Ideology and Utopia is a critique of the<br />
Marxist designation of the proletariat as a universal class and, particularly of<br />
Georg Lukács’s argument that having adopted the standpoint of the proletariat<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
which, in relation to knowledge, has no interest in reproducing the<br />
mystifications which buttress bourgeois rule. According to Lukács, Marxism<br />
can penetrate the veil of reified social relations to reveal the laws of motion of<br />
capitalism and, therefore, produce a truthful account of how society works.<br />
Mills was much too skeptical to buy into this formulation; Mannheim’s<br />
relativism—that “standpoint” thinking inevitably led to partial knowledge—<br />
was more attractive and corresponded to his own pragmatic vision.<br />
Accordingly, knowledge is always infused with interest, even if it occurs behind<br />
the backs of actors. But Mills leans toward ideology as an expression of<br />
intentionality and this characterization is particularly applied to the labor<br />
leaders who are the subjects of The New Men of Power, and the business élite<br />
described in an essay republished in the collected essays, Power Politics and<br />
People and later incorporated in The Power Elite. Lacking an explicit ideology<br />
does not mean that labor or corporate leader can dispense with the tools of<br />
persuasion. But according to Mills, these are the tools of a “practical politician”<br />
rather than that of an ideologue. Thus, Mills’s employment of the word<br />
“rhetoric” to describe how leaders persuade and otherwise justify their<br />
constituencies of policies and programs that may or may not be in their<br />
interest.<br />
Mills was also a close reader of the political and social thought of John Dewey,<br />
perhaps America’s preeminent philosopher of the first half of the 20th century<br />
and one of the leading figures in the development of pragmatism. From<br />
Dewey and from his interlocutor, Walter Lippmann, whose debate with<br />
Dewey on whether there was a chance for a genuine democratic society and<br />
governance in an America increasingly dominated by experts, was among the<br />
most important intellectual events of the 1920s. Mills derived the concept of<br />
the “public” or, in his usage, “publics” from this controversy. By the time<br />
Lippmann’s Public Opinion (1921) appeared, many intellectuals expressed<br />
doubts that the ideal of the public as the foundation of a democratic polity,<br />
which made decisions as well as conferring consent, was at all possible in the<br />
wake of the emergence of mass society with its mass publics and massified<br />
culture.<br />
Lippmann argued, persuasively to many, that a public of independent-minded<br />
individuals was, by the end of World War I, decisively foreclosed by the<br />
complexity of international relations, by advanced technology, the reduction of<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
genuine knowledge from which to adduce opinion to slogans by the mass<br />
media, and the growing role of the state. For a society of citizens, in the sense<br />
of the Greek city-state, who are capable of making the vital decisions affecting<br />
the polity, he held out no hope. Given the conditions for its formation, the<br />
public was shortsighted, prejudiced and, most of all, chronically ill-informed.<br />
While defending the claim that the élite of experts, which came into its own<br />
with the consolidation of the modern state and the modern corporation, was<br />
as desirable as it was inevitable in complex societies, Lippmann retained a trace<br />
of his former socialist skepticism. He wanted a democratic public to force<br />
experts and political leaders to obtain consent on a regular basis and, through<br />
the ballot, to pass judgement on their quasi-sovereign actions. Thus,<br />
democracy was conceived purely negatively, as the barrier against authoritarian,<br />
technocratic rule.<br />
Deeply affected by this powerful argument against participatory democracy,<br />
John Dewey was moved to respond. The Public and its Problems (1925) is, for<br />
all intents and purposes, the most penetrating case for an active polity and for<br />
radical democracy any American has ever written. With Dewey, Mills held that<br />
the promiscuous use of the term “democracy” to describe the de facto<br />
plebiscite of electoral politics, and other mechanisms by which consent is<br />
achieved by representative political institutions, is unwarranted. The<br />
institutions of the liberal state still need the consent of the governed. But the<br />
legislative and executive branches are increasingly beholden to the holders of<br />
institutional power, not their electors, except insofar as the public refuses to<br />
confer consent to policies which they perceive to be contrary to their interests<br />
and, as in the case of social security “reform,” succeeds in staying the hand of<br />
legislators beholden to corporate power, at least for a time. Having entered<br />
into an alliance with the military and corporate orders, the political directorate<br />
becomes a self-contained body, undemocratic in both the process of its<br />
selection and its maintenance.<br />
Dewey’s concept of democracy recalls the New England town meeting in<br />
which the “public” was not a consumer of the work of active and influential<br />
people, but a participant, a decision-maker, in the community’s political and<br />
social life. In this respect, it is important to recall Mills’s “Letter to the New<br />
Left” (1960). The letter outlined the principles of participatory democracy on<br />
the basis of Dewey’s concept of the public, and was, perhaps, the single most<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
influential document in the early history of Students for a Democratic Society,<br />
one of the key organizations in the development of the social movements of<br />
the 1960s. SDS’s program, enunciated in its manifesto, The Port Huron<br />
Statement was constructed around the concept/demand for “participatory”<br />
democracy in which “ordinary people” could control the “decisions that<br />
affected their lives.” It presupposed the same distrust of the state and its<br />
branches that Mills evinced years earlier. But unlike the immediate post-World<br />
War II years when, notwithstanding its de facto expiration, the New Deal still<br />
inspired broad support for what Herbert Croly termed The Promise of<br />
American Life (which Mills names as the most important work of liberal<br />
statism), two decades of militaristic statism and the appearance of a new<br />
generation of political activism made Mills’s radical democratic appeal more<br />
audible.<br />
III<br />
Mills was also a great taxonomist. With his mentor, Hans Gerth, he published<br />
in 1953 a major social psychology, Character and Social Structure, which<br />
situates the self firmly in the social and historical context which shapes and is<br />
shaped by it. This work is, perhaps, the premier instance of Mills’s efforts to<br />
combine theoretical social science with the distinctly American psychology of<br />
William James and George Herbert Mead, but in these days when the little<br />
boxes of the mind seem to pervade social thought, this book languishes in the<br />
archives of largely unread masterworks. Gerth and Mills’s bold juxtapositions<br />
are simply too adventuresome for a social science academy for which<br />
conventional wisdom seems to be the farthest horizon of possibility.. And his<br />
numerous essays covered the broad expanse of issues in American politics and<br />
culture, a range which has caused more than one detractor to complain that he<br />
is “all over the place.” In this respect, Mills is a true scion of the great thinkers<br />
who founded the social sciences. Their task was to provide a philosophical<br />
scaffolding to the disciplines, a project which Mills understood did not end<br />
with the canonical works. As a pragmatist, he was acutely aware that theory<br />
requires constant renewal and revisions and that, contrary to much current<br />
thinking, the problem is not one of “applications” of received wisdom but to<br />
interrogate the wisdom in the light of contemporary developments. So, even as<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
Mills borrows concepts such as “élite” from eminent forebears, he refuses the<br />
hierarchical thinking that informed the writings of theorists such as Mosca and<br />
Pareto. For example, he invests new significance to it in the process of<br />
investigating historically-situated élites. As a result, the labor union élite and<br />
the power (ruling) élite display different characteristics, although in The New<br />
Men of Power we can see the first pass at the development of a new theory<br />
His main theoretical project, explicated most fully in Character and Social<br />
Structure, was to situate the biographies of leading economic and political<br />
actors—labor leaders, the main figures in business, military and political<br />
institutions—within the social structure and the spatio-temporal context<br />
which set the limits and provided the opportunities for their activity. This<br />
methodological imperative is designed to account for individual variation of<br />
broad types, but also demonstrate the degree to which the social structure—<br />
explicitly named in terms of key institutional orders sets, at a specific time and<br />
specific place, the limits as well as the opportunities for individual and group<br />
action. Thus, our biographies mediate, and are mediated by, the institutional<br />
frameworks which condition decision-making. While, except in White Collar<br />
Mills is interested mainly in describing and explaining the structure of power,<br />
rather than of the worlds of the relatively powerless, this work is always<br />
undertaken in the interest of reconstructing a democratic public.<br />
we shall use this term psychic structure (emphasis in the<br />
original) to refer to man conceived as an integration of<br />
perception, emotion, and impulse. Of course there are other<br />
psychic functions, memory and imagination for example, but<br />
we shall limit our terms at this point. For our purpose,<br />
“psychic structure” will refer to when, how and why man feels,<br />
perceives and wills.<br />
At the core of Gerth and Mills’s theory are the concepts of “institution” and<br />
“self.” The notion of institutional order connotes the complex of institutions<br />
which, taken together, constitute what we loosely designate as the structure of<br />
power in “society,” chiefly the political, economic and military orders. Thus<br />
conceived the character structure of individuals formed by physical, and social<br />
conditions, particularly those of childhood biography, including family and<br />
schooling prepares them for playing certain “roles” within the institutional<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
orders to which they gravitate or are assigned by virtue of their education and<br />
training, situations which themselves are the outcome of certain interactions<br />
and relationships. The formation of the self in childhood is crucial for<br />
structuring the life chances of individuals, conditioning, if not completely<br />
determining the ways they structure knowledge, their emotional and volitional<br />
proclivities. But these processes are only relatively unique in individuals;<br />
conditions of social location, class, race and ethnicity, and education—play a<br />
decisive part in shaping the choices available to whole groups of people. The<br />
basic unit of analysis then, is not the individual but collective selves.<br />
Thus his writings are suffused with “ideal types”—Weber’s methodological<br />
prescription to fashion composite profiles against which to measure any<br />
particular instance of the type—arranged horizontally as well as vertically. The<br />
models assembled in The New Men of Power—of labor leaders, or in The<br />
Power Elite, where he provides a collective portrait of business leaders, and in<br />
his essays published in the collection Power Politics and People which contains<br />
several composites of the various publics which he addresses and to which he is<br />
obliged to respond—give a glimpse of Mills’s lifelong approach to social<br />
knowledge: first, produce a composite profile of the subject. Then, provide<br />
detailed historically-informed descriptions of the context within which the<br />
subject(s) operate, and evaluate the relative salience of each element of this<br />
context to how the subject is shaped. Then, return to the subject by unpacking<br />
the composite to break down the different social and character types. Finally,<br />
re-place them in the larger political, economic and cultural situations. To what<br />
end? To find out what are the alternatives to the main drift of politics and<br />
ideologies. Needless to say, although a student of élites, Mills asks whether the<br />
democratic movement from below, of the rank and file union members,<br />
fractured publics of consumers and intellectuals, may succeed in overcoming<br />
the pervasive tendency toward oligarchic domination of government and civil<br />
life.<br />
For most of his academic career Mills taught sociology at Columbia<br />
University. He produced social knowledge but was also an intellectual agitator.<br />
He was deeply interested in advancing the science of sociology as a means of<br />
giving us a wider understanding of how society worked. But, from the late<br />
1940s when, at age thirty two, Mills and Helen Schneider produced their<br />
landmark study of the American labor union leaders, he remained a close<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
student of social movements; his writings span analyses of the labor<br />
movement, the student left, the peace movement and others. He swam,<br />
intellectually, against the current, yet unlike many independent leftists who<br />
saw only defeat in the post-war drift toward militaristic-corporate political<br />
economy and despaired of relevant political practice, he was, above all, a<br />
practical thinker whose interest was always to describe the “main” chance as a<br />
dead end and to counterpose the chances for leftward social change.<br />
Consequently, even when he is the most descriptive of, say, labor leaders, and<br />
portrays the new middle class in terms of subordination and as allies of the<br />
leading élites, his eyes never strayed far from the question of “ what is to be<br />
done?” What are the levers for changing the prevailing relations of power?<br />
How can those at or near the bottom emerge as historical subjects?<br />
Mills is aware that to reach beyond the audience of professional social scientists<br />
he is obliged to employ a rhetoric that, as much as possible, stays within<br />
natural, even colloquial language. Addressing the general reader as well as his<br />
diminishing audience of academic colleagues, Mills conveyed often difficult<br />
and theoretically sophisticated concepts in plain, but often visual prose,<br />
described by one critic as “muscular.” And, perhaps most famously, he was a<br />
phrasemaker. For example, his concept of the “main drift” to connote<br />
conventional wisdom, as well as centrist politics encapsulates in a single phrase<br />
what others require paragraphs to explain. And, instead of using the Marxianloaded<br />
term “crisis” or the technical dodge “recession,” to describe conditions<br />
of economic woe he employed the colloquial “slump.” He characterizes the rise<br />
of industrial unions after 1935 as the “big story” for American labor, a term<br />
which encompasses history and common perception. But the imperatives of<br />
the Cold War—especially the emergence of the military as a dominant<br />
institutional order—constitutes the big story of the immediate post-war era.<br />
Mills wrote scholarly works but, in keeping with the style of a public<br />
intellectual, he was also a pamphleteer, a proclivity that often disturbed his<br />
colleagues and, in one of the more odious forms of academic hubris, led some<br />
to dismiss him as a “mere journalist.” In fact, this dismissal may, in addition to<br />
his boldness in attacking the big themes of social theory and analysis, account<br />
for the sad truth that since the late 1970s his major works are virtually unread<br />
in social science classrooms, have disappeared from many scholarly references,<br />
and are largely undiscussed in the academic trade. In the last decade of his life,<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
manifestos and indictments of the prevailing social and political order issued<br />
from his pen as frequently as sociological works. In fact, The Power Elite,<br />
which has inspired a sub-discipline whose academic practitioners include G.<br />
William Domhoff, America’s leading consumer advocate and anti-corporate<br />
campaigner, Ralph Nader, and a veritable army of “public interest” researchers,<br />
has always been controversial on theoretical grounds, but also, despite its often<br />
meticulous and comprehensive collection of “data,” criticized for lack of<br />
objectivity in its clear democratic bias. In these days when most members of<br />
the professorate have retreated from public engagement except as consultants<br />
for large corporations, media experts, and recipients of the grant largesse of<br />
corporate foundations and government agencies who want their research to<br />
assist in policy formulation, or confine their interventions to professional<br />
journals and meetings, Mills remains an embarrassing reminder of one possible<br />
answer to this veritable privatization of legitimate intellectual knowledge. In<br />
1939 his colleague Robert S. Lynd published a probing challenge to<br />
knowledge producers of all sorts called Knowledge for What? He asked the<br />
fundamental question: to whom is the knowledge producer responsible? To<br />
the state? To private corporations? To publics that are concerned with issues of<br />
equality social justice? (Robert S. Lynd, 1939)<br />
Mills rejects as spurious the prevailing doctrine according to which the social<br />
investigator is obliged to purge the work of social and political commitment.<br />
His values infuse the sociological research and theorizing and he never hides<br />
behind methodological protestations of neutrality. Mills is, instead, a partisan<br />
of movements of social freedom and emancipation while, at the same time,<br />
preserving his dedication to dry-eyed, critical theory and dispassionate,<br />
empirical inquiry. An advocate of a democratic, radical labor movement he<br />
was, nevertheless, moved to indict its leadership, not by fulmination, but by a<br />
careful investigation of how unions actually worked in the immediate post-war<br />
period. A self-described “man of the left,” in the late 1940s Mills provoked his<br />
left publics to outrage when he concluded that the “old” socialist and<br />
communist movements had come to the end of the road. By the late fifties, as<br />
the frost of the Cold War melted a bit after the rise of Nikita Khruschev to<br />
power in the Soviet Union and the power élite’s recognition that the anti-<br />
Communist purges had hurt U.S. domestic as well as foreign policy, he was<br />
loudly proclaiming the need for a “new” left that had the courage to throw off<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
the ideological baggage of the past, especially Marxist orthodoxy and<br />
Stalinism.<br />
Like Jean-Paul Sartre, whose Critique of Dialectical Reason appeared in 1960,<br />
he came to regard tradition, even radical tradition, as a political albatross. He<br />
never used Sartre’s fancy term “practico-inert” to mark the encrusted habits<br />
that induce people to reproduce the past in the present but he was a persistent<br />
critic of the habituation of the left to old ideas. A withering opponent of the<br />
Communists, sensing the impending doom of the Soviet Union after the<br />
opening provided by the Khruschev’s revelations of Stalin’s crimes at the 20th<br />
Communist Party Congress in 1956, he was among the first to urge the young<br />
to disdain their elders’ preoccupation with the “Russian” question and instead<br />
attend with fresh eyes and hearts to the tasks at hand: to oppose U.S.<br />
intervention in the affairs of revolutionary societies and to establish the<br />
framework for a radical democratic society.<br />
I have no doubt he was right to urge the young radicals to distance themselves<br />
from the past, at least in the short or intermediate term. But he never made<br />
clear that he himself had been reared, politically, on the Russian question and<br />
forgot that those who ignore addressing the failure of the revolution were<br />
doomed to relive it, an eventuality he was never cursed to witness. That the<br />
New Left, which soon captured the imagination of an entire generation, went<br />
awry may not be attributed exclusively to its refusal to address really existing<br />
socialisms of the Stalinist variety. But, it was entirely disarmed when, in the<br />
wake of the heating up of the war in southeast Asia, various Marxist ideologies<br />
became matters of urgent debate; most young leftists found themselves<br />
overwhelmed. They were moved by guilt as much as ignorance to confer<br />
uncritical support to the Vietnamese communists and even hailed the efforts of<br />
Pol Pot in Cambodia. By 1970, many reared the New Left were no longer<br />
Mills’ spiritual children; they all but renounced his democratic faith in favor of<br />
a “third world” dogma of national liberation at all costs. But, ironically, Mills<br />
himself was not immune from such enthusiasms.<br />
The book-length pamphlets were received as more than controversial, not only<br />
because they were, in many minds, notoriously heretical for their tacit<br />
violation of academic insularity, but also because they broke from the main<br />
tenets of the Cold War anti-Communist consensus at a time when, under<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
siege, political repression was still alive and well in the United States. The<br />
Causes of World War Three (1958) is, in many respects, a popularization and<br />
application to the international scale of The Power Elite. It depicts world<br />
politics in terms of the rivalry to two power blocs, one led by the United<br />
States and the other by the Soviet Union, both of which are governed by<br />
irresponsible élites whose conduct of the nuclear arms race threatens the very<br />
existence of humanity. Written in a period when one could count the number<br />
of radicals with full-time appointments in American universities on one hand<br />
and when the preponderant ex-radicals had “chosen the west,” this equalization<br />
of responsibility for the world crisis between east and west endeared Mills<br />
neither to the communists and their periphery, for whom the Soviet Union<br />
was virtually blameless for the state of things, nor to Cold War liberals for<br />
whom any suggestion that United States foreign policy could contribute to the<br />
chances for the outbreak of World War III was as shocking as it was absurd.<br />
Hidden in the pages of his work is the influence of the one rather obscure<br />
strain of radicalism which, after the war, declared that both camps were forms<br />
of a new anti-democratic, militaristic capitalism and boldly, but futilely, called<br />
for the formation of a “third” camp whose base would be a radicalized labor<br />
movement in alliance with other anti-capitalist elements of the population.<br />
The project failed since at the time of its formulation, the leading unions in<br />
every capitalist country were busy making deals with their own corporations<br />
and with the capitalist state, and leftists were divided between those who were<br />
safely ensconced in the Cold War consensus or, despite everything, remained<br />
Soviet apologists. Mills’s appeal to the “public,” translated in this context to an<br />
appeal to the middle class liberal center, proved more effective for it<br />
corresponded to the emergence of a mass movement against the testing and use<br />
of nuclear weapons and for an end to the Cold War. Needless to say, the<br />
preponderance of American labor leaders, including Walter Reuther, the liberal<br />
president of the largest industrial union, the auto workers, were aligned with<br />
their own government’s policies and were convinced that the price of<br />
demilitarization was nothing less than a new slump. And even as he discounted<br />
the politicos as allies to the top layers of corporate and military power, Mills<br />
was equally skeptical that the intellectuals, the social type upon which political<br />
dissent conventionally relies, were adequate to the occasion.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
A self-declared independent leftist (which, in the Cold War era meant an anti-<br />
Stalinist, but unaligned radical), Mills had been influenced by Trotskyism early<br />
in his life. He carefully separated the still influential Communists from<br />
radicalism. The Communists were influential precisely because the party had<br />
been an important vehicle for organizing major industrial unions and for<br />
bringing militant workers into the New Deal. During the war, they played a<br />
major role in enforcing the wartime no-strike pledge and the government’s<br />
drive for productivity. Mills believed that whatever oppositional politics they<br />
evinced after the war was due, almost exclusively, to the chasm between the<br />
United States and the Soviet Union.<br />
Listen Yankee (1961) an exemplary instance of Mills’s penchant for rowing<br />
upstream, was, during its early years, a fierce defense of the Cuban revolution<br />
when, even for many anti-Stalinist radicals, it appeared that the regime was<br />
dedicated to raising living standards and was still open to a democratic society.<br />
At a time when even the liberal icon, Oregon Senator Wayne Morse, was a<br />
vocal advocate of counterrevolution and supported the Kennedy<br />
administration’s ill-fated Bay of Pigs invasion, Mills asserted the right of the<br />
Cuban people to determine their own destiny and sharply condemned U.S.<br />
policy in the Caribbean and Latin America. He excoriated liberals and<br />
conservatives alike for their support of anti-popular regimes such as that of<br />
Batista in Cuba and Somoza’s brutal Nicaraguan dictatorship, pointing out<br />
how the U.S. government had opposed democratic efforts by financing<br />
military counterinsurgency, especially against the Arbenz regime in Guatemala<br />
as well as Cuba’s new revolutionary government. While he had been a lifelong<br />
anti-Communist, Mills saw the Cuban revolution as a harbinger of the long<br />
struggle of peasants and workers for liberation from colonialism and<br />
imperialism and predicted serious future confrontations between the spreading<br />
insurgencies and the United States which, under Democratic and Republican<br />
national administrations alike, became the main defender of the dictators.<br />
Indeed, for the length of the 1960s and beyond, Mills’s provocative<br />
intervention seemed prescient. In Colombia, Douglas Bravo led a formidable<br />
armed uprising and Che Guevara led a band of guerillas into the Bolivian<br />
jungle which, like the Colombian revolt, failed. But, with Cuba’s material<br />
help the Sandanistas in Nicaragua and the National Liberation Front in El<br />
Salvador were alive with revolutionary activity and, by the mid-1960s the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
dormant Puerto Rican independence movement revived under Marxist<br />
leadership which closely identified with the Cuban revolution. In the 1970s,<br />
Maurice Bishop organized a successful uprising in Grenada which openly<br />
aligned itself with the Cuban revolution and <strong>Michael</strong> Manley’s democraticallyelected<br />
left social-democratic government in Jamaica forged close ties with<br />
Cuba. However much he was smitten, Mills framed much of his own<br />
discourse in terms of the significant of these events for America’s neo-colonial<br />
foreign policy and for America’s future. Lacking the tools of discriminating<br />
evaluation, many young radicals not only gave their unconditional support but<br />
enlisted as volunteers in Grenada, Cuba and Nicaragua’s education and health<br />
efforts.<br />
IV<br />
Mills is both an exhilarating exemplar of the role and reach of the public<br />
radical intellectual, and at the same time, a sobering reminder of how far the<br />
human sciences have descended since the end of the Vietnam War. For even in<br />
death Mills was an inspiration to a generation of young intellectuals estranged<br />
from the suburban nightmare of post-World War II America and eager to<br />
shape their own destiny, and to some in his own generation who, in fear and<br />
trembling, had withdrawn from public involvement, but yearned to return.<br />
The decline of social engagement and political responsibility that accompanied<br />
the ebbing of the impulse to reform and revolution in the 1970s and 1980s,<br />
witnessed the shift of labor, socialist and social liberal parties and movements<br />
to the liberal center. Many erstwhile radical intellectuals who retained their<br />
public voice moved steadily to the right, motivated, they said, by the<br />
authoritarianism of the New as well as the Old Left, and by their conviction<br />
that American capitalism and its democratic institutions were the best of all<br />
possible worlds.<br />
He suffered the sometimes scorching rebuke of his contemporaries and, even as<br />
he won the admiration of the young as well as the tattered battalions of left<br />
intellectuals, had severed his ties with much of the liberal center which sorely<br />
needed to hear his argument that, in face of the awesome and almost complete<br />
hegemony of the power élite, American democratic institutions were in a state<br />
of almost complete meltdown. That recently a small body of scholars have<br />
revisited his legacy should be welcomed. The question of whether intellectuals<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Stanley Aronowitz<br />
will remain tucked into their academic bunkers depends not only on the<br />
depressions or wars to pry them out. Indeed the economic slumps that have<br />
punctuated the last two decades have failed to move most to utterance,<br />
although there is evidence that, after 9/11 some radical intellectuals have<br />
engaged in protest against the U.S. promulgated war on Iraq or have entered<br />
the debate on the side of the government. In the final reckoning, even if, after<br />
1950, most of Mills’s tirades were self-motivated, although a decade later<br />
Mills looked to an aroused coterie of young intellectuals as the source of a new<br />
democratic public, it is usually resurgent labor and other social movements to<br />
which intellectuals respond. While it can be argued that prior to 9/11 there<br />
were signs of revival in the political opposition, it remains to be seen whether,<br />
after suffering the defeats of the early years of the 21st century, the radical,<br />
nomadic spirit of C. Wright Mills will inculcate the minds and hearts of the<br />
intellectuals and activists upon whom he bestowed so much hope.<br />
Stanley Aronowitz is Distinguished Professor of Sociology at the Graduate<br />
Center, CUNY. His latest book, How Class Works, is available from Yale<br />
University Press.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
P<br />
Ali Hossaini<br />
Vision of the Gods:<br />
An Inquiry Into the Meaning of Photography<br />
by<br />
Ali Hossaini<br />
hotography is ubiquitous within global culture, but we hardly understand<br />
its meaning. And we have only a dim comprehension of its origin. Unlike<br />
cinema, which contains the complexities of motion and montage, the<br />
photograph is simple and, for the most part, brutally realistic. Perhaps the<br />
photograph has seemed too obvious to merit prolonged scholarly attention.<br />
Histories of the medium abound, but their authors follow a pattern<br />
exemplified by Alison and Helmut Gernsheim’s distinguished History of<br />
Photography, first published in 1955. By the standard account, the first<br />
inklings of photography appeared when a 5th century scholar noticed a<br />
camera-like phenomenon, and culminated in the 1820s, when Nicephore<br />
Niepce doped a pewter plate with light-sensitive chemicals and exposed it<br />
within a camera obscura. At their most comprehensive, standard histories<br />
include references to the mediaeval scientists who experimented with pinhole<br />
optics and ultimately invented the camera obscura.<br />
Though the standard account is correct in its details, it neglects the broader<br />
context of photography. Photography is an evolutionary phenomenon, not a<br />
fixed process, and it has drastically altered society at each stage of refinement.<br />
Starting with simple devices, the medium has branched into an enormous<br />
family of technologies that includes cinema, television and digital imagery.<br />
Individuals use cameras, but the medium is far more powerful in the hands of<br />
corporations and the state. Optical media entertain and inform, impress and<br />
oppress; they permeate everyday life, yet cultural theory does not approach<br />
this variety from a coherent base of understanding. What ties together<br />
snapshots and surveillance? Theorists perceive the social effects of mass<br />
media, which range from liberation to abject dehumanization, but the origin<br />
of these effects has not been outlined. We need a paradigm that captures the<br />
common thread of photographic technologies, one that matches the<br />
sophistication of contemporary engineering. Current theory of the<br />
photograph depends on the camera, but the physical device is insufficient to<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
explain the evolution of the optical media, particularly as it progresses toward<br />
the dematerialized realm of digital imagery and virtual reality.<br />
Much has already been written about virtual reality. Though the medium is<br />
not yet viable, it has ample precedents ranging from Plato’s Cave Passage to<br />
nineteenth century dioramas. The strongest precedent, however, is the virtual<br />
experience offered by photography and cinema, both of which derive, like the<br />
examples I just gave, from reflection upon optics. Whether or not it comes to<br />
pass, the idea of a virtual environment should serve as a boundary condition<br />
for photographic theory, because it illustrates the profound impact of optics<br />
on society. For most of its existence humanity has experienced the world<br />
through natural faculties, but the introduction of optical media has<br />
reorganized perception and replaced subjectivity. As a consequence,<br />
individuals have become part of increasingly larger collectives where both<br />
thought and experience are defined by objective standards. The environment<br />
has become mediated, defined by surveillance and institutions, and, as Jean<br />
Baudrillard has poignantly described, experience is often equated with media.<br />
The central issues in photographic theory are defined by the history of optics.<br />
The study of vision and light has an ancient pedigree which scholars have<br />
only nodded toward when discussing photography. Scientific optics matured<br />
by the 3rd century BCE, when Euclid codified its principles alongside its<br />
parent discipline, geometry. Organized as a set of formal principles, Euclid’s<br />
Geometry describes the construction of forms in an abstract space, giving their<br />
appearance to an ideal intelligence. In contrast, his Optics described the<br />
behavior of light in relation to a situated viewer. Taken together, the two<br />
works present a theory of how the physical world is constituted in reality and<br />
appearance, with the latter describing how light transmits information from<br />
the physical, geometric realm to the eyes.<br />
Euclid’s optical study represents a high point of knowledge that remained<br />
almost unmatched until the scientist Ibn al-Haytham published his optical<br />
treatises in the 9th century. 1 Building on the work of Euclid and his<br />
successor, Claudius Ptolemy, Al-Haytham founded physiological optics,<br />
which distinguished the functioning of the eye from the behavior of light. He<br />
also laid the groundwork for the camera obscura by accurately explaining the<br />
pinhole effect which underlies its mechanism. Several centuries later, well<br />
after al-Haytham’s Optics passed into Europe, the camera obscura emerged<br />
from the laboratory as a tool for artists, but it was not until the 1600s that<br />
Johannes Kepler discovered the proper operation of the eye. Much like a<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
camera, human eyes augment the pinhole effect with a lens, bringing an<br />
inverted image to bear on a light-sensitive surface, the retina. (See Figure 1)<br />
Figure 1: The structure of the eye compared to the camera<br />
(Wald, 1953)<br />
Unlike those who followed, Kepler considered retinal inversion to be an<br />
important problem. But he despaired of solving it and left its resolution to<br />
later generations. 2 Progress came slowly. Little was known about the nervous<br />
system until the nineteenth century, and only recently have scientists learned<br />
how to inspect thought in real time. Now we know how the brain<br />
apprehends the retinal image. But many questions still elude us. What effect<br />
does media have on perception? Has sharing images—sharing perceptions—<br />
affected individuality? Optical technologies permeate daily life, and, by<br />
bridging vast distances, they have changed the nature of vision. The personal<br />
has become institutional, mediated by cameras and computers, and we<br />
inhabit virtual bodies created by photography, the telephone and television.<br />
So our primary question might address how technology affects biology. Is<br />
technology a form of evolution? Has social evolution superseded biological<br />
evolution? Will governments and corporations completely subsume the<br />
individual, limiting choice to matters of consumption? In confronting these<br />
questions, optics is relevant to some of the most pressing issues in cultural<br />
theory and, for that matter, human existence.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Photography represents the growing intimacy of humanity with machines.<br />
Tools originally amplified physical strength, but, with the advent of tools like<br />
the abacus, the compass and eyeglasses, they have been applied increasingly to<br />
mental faculties, giving us both modern media and digital computers. And<br />
recent advances in bioengineering are giving tools a quasi-organic status,<br />
merging them with our bodies. In 1950, biologist George Wald said<br />
photography was the product of convergent evolution:<br />
Of all the instruments made by man, none resembles a part of<br />
his body more than the camera does the eye. Yet this is not by<br />
design. A camera is no more a copy of an eye than the wing of<br />
a bird is a copy of that of an insect. Each is the product of an<br />
independent evolution; and if this has brought the camera<br />
and the eye together, it is not because one has mimicked the<br />
other, but because both have had to meet the same problems,<br />
and have frequently done so in the same way. This is the type<br />
of phenomenon that biologists call convergent evolution, yet<br />
peculiar in that one evolution is organic, the other<br />
technological. 3<br />
Wald then makes structural, mechanical and chemical comparisons between<br />
eyes and the photographic process. The similarities are numerous. Both use a<br />
lens to project an image within a dark chamber, both correct for aberrations<br />
in form and color, and both apprehend images through a grid of<br />
photosensitive receptors. As the capstone to his argument, Wald ends his<br />
essay with a discussion of optography, the art of making images with eyes.<br />
Willy Kuhne, a professor of physiology at the University of Heidelberg,<br />
invented optography in 1878. Kuhne was studying rhodopsin, the retinal<br />
pigment that changes state in response to light. During the course of his<br />
experiments, he realized that he might be able to take pictures with a living<br />
eye. He immobilized a rabbit and forced it to look at a window for three<br />
minutes. He then decapitated the animal, sliced open its eye, and soaked its<br />
retina in alum to fix the rhodopsin. The next day the dried retina revealed an<br />
image of the window. Two years later he repeated the process with the head<br />
of an executed criminal. The resulting optigram, which he reproduced in a<br />
drawing, is the only known picture taken with a human eye. Unfortunately,<br />
the scene it displayed was unidentifiable. (See Figures 2 and 3)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Figure 2: The rabbit’s last view (Wald, 1953)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Figure 3: A human optigram<br />
(Wald, 1953)<br />
Evolutionary convergence explains the utility of cameras and casts a revealing<br />
light on media theory, particularly the work of Marshall McLuhan.<br />
McLuhan’s descriptions of how media affect cognition seem hyperbolic,<br />
more metaphor than science, but if we accept Wald’s conclusions, then the<br />
spread of media has a biological basis. Photography is an auxiliary form of<br />
perception. It amplifies vision, takes it to extremes of size, distance and speed.<br />
It extends the human nervous system, particularly when coupled to electronic<br />
distribution. Visual media are among the cornerstones of modern civilization,<br />
found in the service of law, science and industry, as well as the arts and<br />
personal life. When we examine the category of photography as a whole,<br />
including cinema, video and digital imagery with paper and film, we find a<br />
medium that mimics vision, providing sensations that bridge space and time.<br />
Photographs are concrete perceptions that orient groups of people around a<br />
singular, objective experience. Along with social hierarchy, and other<br />
technologies of communication, photographic images constitute a body social<br />
that behaves according to common impulses.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Photography has thus developed along two axes. The first is a train of<br />
technical and scientific discovery that stretches deep into history. As far as we<br />
know, optics was invented by the mathematicians of ancient Greece, but its<br />
parent science, geometry, is of far older pedigree, having reached an advanced<br />
state in the pre-Classical cultures of Mesopotamia and Egypt. The other axis<br />
derives from the communication needs of the cultures that developed<br />
photography and related technologies. Each axis reinforces our understanding<br />
of the other, and, by linking the two together, we can describe the evolution<br />
of technologies which led from archaic times to photography then cinema,<br />
television and virtual reality. As I discuss in a larger work, Archaeology of the<br />
Photograph, a consistent set of social, political and economic goals has driven<br />
the emergence of these practices, and photography stands as the paradigm of<br />
both their physical appearance and mechanical functioning.<br />
The Ontology of the Photograph<br />
CAMERAS ARE THE MOST OBVIOUS ELEMENT OF PHOTOGRAPHY, but we<br />
should not stay preoccupied with them. Photographs are conveniently<br />
rendered by cameras, but the information within a photograph—the<br />
information that defines it—can be generated in several ways. Photorealist<br />
imagery can be produced by hand and computer, so we cannot rely solely on<br />
the camera to define photography. Nor can we place cameras at the<br />
beginning of the medium, for we still need to ask the question, “What is the<br />
origin of the camera?” Many histories of photography have been written, but<br />
only lately with the emergence of satellite surveillance and virtual reality, can<br />
we completely define the paradigm of optics. An unwritten history lies<br />
behind the development of photography.<br />
To access this history, we cannot, as scholars have traditionally done, treat<br />
photography as a discrete industrial process. Photography is not a specific<br />
activity but a way of seeing, a mechanized form of perception. It is a technical<br />
approach to visual representation based on optics. (Or perspective: they mean<br />
the same thing in their original usage.) And photography is ultimately<br />
geometric since optics/perspective derives from the investigation of space. As<br />
we shall see, photography also relates to the physiology of vision, and its<br />
advances have tracked fundamental progress in the scientific understanding<br />
of cognition. Starting with its invention in the nineteenth century,<br />
photography projects forward into cinema, television and digital media. And<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
it telescopes backward into earlier modalities based in painting, drawing,<br />
cartography and geometry. Media scholars have hinted at this history, but<br />
engineers have written it, and it remains inscribed in generations of tools.<br />
Photography is paradigmatic act of representation, one which blankets the<br />
environment with information. The expression of photographic technology<br />
has followed a path set in the formative days of civilization, and, ironically, its<br />
purpose is clearest in its earliest forms.<br />
Like most machines, cameras automated processes previously done by hand.<br />
The tools of Renaissance painters are obvious forebears to the camera which<br />
makes photography closely related to classical modes of representation like<br />
architecture and mapping. If we trace these practices—perspectival painting,<br />
architecture and cartography—to their collective origin, we arrive at the<br />
archaic civilization of Sumer and the technology of land surveying, or applied<br />
geometry. Surveying occupies a privileged place in the history of photography<br />
and, more generally, of technical drawing. It inspired theoretic geometry,<br />
which in turn spawned optics, astronomy and cartography, the first sciences.<br />
I will collectively refer to these geometric disciplines as technologies of<br />
perception. Succeeding civilizations around the Mediterranean and Europe<br />
have adopted these perceptual practices, and a direct line of transmission<br />
links Sumerian land surveying to present-day photography and electronic<br />
media.<br />
Within this article, I will describe some of the connections between archaic<br />
surveying and modern technology. An important premise of my discussion<br />
lies in the nature of automation or, more precisely, the definition of the<br />
machine. I mentioned above that preoccupation with cameras can lead to<br />
misunderstandings about photography. The photographic camera is a<br />
machine for taking pictures, and it thus seems different in kind from any<br />
other apparatus, even the camera obscura, which still requires an artist to<br />
draw the image. But since a photograph is simply information—the<br />
information specific to a visual display—we need to question whether<br />
cameras are necessary to produce a photographic “thing,” that is, an optically<br />
correct image. This is clearly not the case. Renaissance painters and their<br />
successors devised accurate methods for producing optically correct images,<br />
and their work conditioned the emergence of the camera obscura and<br />
photographic machinery.<br />
I submit that the work of perspectival artists—a group that ranges from<br />
Donatello to the photorealists—lies between intuition and automation. In<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
other words, perspectival drawing lies between the delicate naturalism of<br />
Paleolithic painting and the stark realism of photography. During the<br />
Renaissance, the production of art began to be mechanized, and picture<br />
making went beyond expression to become media.<br />
The work of Lewis Mumford may clarify my position. In Technics and<br />
Human Civilization, Mumford introduces the concept of the megamachine, a<br />
social machine that coordinates human rather than nonhuman energy.<br />
Arising in early civilizations, the megamachine arose when leaders used<br />
scientific principles to increase the size, power and precision of work crews.<br />
By coordinating human labor with precise measurements and tools, early<br />
leaders were able to direct the construction of massive pyramids without the<br />
use of engines and other advanced technologies. Unlike many other human<br />
endeavors, a primary feature of the megamachine is the dominance of<br />
method. Like an inorganic mechanism, workers applied tools of<br />
measurement that let them precisely engineer buildings according to plan.<br />
Their own judgment was auxiliary to measurements and central direction.<br />
Like earlier surveyors and architects, Renaissance painters allowed scientific<br />
principles to determine the structure of their work. Their work was closely<br />
allied with engineering and architecture. Optical effects were difficult to<br />
realize with medieval tools, so artists quickly adopted more advanced<br />
machines to assist their efforts. The requirements of perspective conditioned<br />
the emergence of the camera obscura in the late Renaissance, and the desire<br />
of successive generations to fully automate image production led to<br />
photography. The process continues today. Electronic processing is<br />
dematerializing the camera into the universal machine (and universal<br />
medium) of computers. New technologies like digital animation and virtual<br />
reality use optical principles, but, like Renaissance painting, they posit the<br />
camera as an ideal machine, a perspective that organizes representation<br />
according to a coherent point of view.<br />
Photographs function by reproducing the vantage of the eye, and the analogy<br />
between eyes and cameras runs deep. As Kuhne first demonstrated, the eye is<br />
a camera, and vice versa, and they can sometimes be exchanged. Our<br />
understanding of the brain is on the increase; it seems likely that, in the near<br />
future, cameras will induce vision through direct neural implants. 4 When fed<br />
directly to the brain, media becomes immediate, more like an environment<br />
than an overlay. McLuhan’s description of an optical-electronic nervous<br />
system may have sounded fictional when he uttered it, but it is rapidly<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
becoming true in the fundamental sense, mainly because media now<br />
integrates our perceptual apparatus. The convergence of technology with<br />
biology continues on the level of image processing. Like human vision, the<br />
camera produces internal representations of the world which can be recalled<br />
and manipulated. Fidelity is key to photography and natural perception<br />
because both are directed toward depicting an environment that must be<br />
exploited for navigation, communication and survival. Thus the ontology of<br />
the photograph derives from its fundamental utility as a representation of the<br />
visual environment—and from the act of vision itself.<br />
Andre Bazin presented one of the first theoretic statements regarding<br />
photographic realism in his essay, “What is a Photograph,” which appeared<br />
in 1937. He attributes a simple realism to the medium, as he opens and shuts<br />
the door on a theory of photography.<br />
Besides, painting is . . . an ersatz of the processes of<br />
reproduction. Only a photographic lens can give us the kind<br />
of image of the object that is capable of satisfying the deep<br />
need man has to substitute for it [the object] something more<br />
than a mere approximation . . . The photographic image is<br />
the object itself, the object freed from the conditions of time<br />
and space that govern it. No matter how fuzzy, distorted, or<br />
discolored, no matter how lacking in documentary value the<br />
image may be, it shares, by virtue of the very process of its<br />
becoming, the being of the model of which it is the<br />
reproduction; it is the model. 5<br />
Even as he gives the final word on photography, Bazin indicates that cinema<br />
is a much richer field for theory, closing with, “On the other hand, cinema is<br />
also a language.” Bazin subsequently founded the field of cinema studies, and<br />
for decades scholars had little to say about photography. In the late 1950s,<br />
Roland Barthes discussed photographs, taking a linguistic approach adopted<br />
in the 1970s by a coterie that included Alan Sekula, Victor Burgin and Judith<br />
Williamson. Since then a field of critical photographic studies has emerged to<br />
analyze the various uses of photography in propaganda, advertising,<br />
surveillance and personal life.<br />
Though placed in a multitude of disciplines, most studies of photography are<br />
either sociological, seeking a language of photography within its human<br />
elements, or phenomenological, attending to the mysteries of perception at a<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
distance. Some claim that perspective is simply a Western convention for<br />
representation, though such arguments are difficult to maintain against<br />
optics. The dawn of the digital era has added a twist to writing on<br />
photography, giving a new generation of scholars the opportunity to decry a<br />
post-objective era.<br />
Current scholarship on photography is fragmented because it possesses no<br />
disciplinary paradigm. Beyond an unproductive dichotomy between realism<br />
and conventionalism, and an often-blurry technical history, we have no<br />
concrete understanding of how photography emerged, let alone how it<br />
engages the social mechanism. What forces gave impulse to the camera and<br />
its trajectory of development? While Bazin painfully emphasizes the objective<br />
realism of photography, and derails further study, he points to a generative<br />
function within the medium. The photographic image is not just an ersatz<br />
representation. It reproduces the environment, the thing itself, and becomes<br />
an ideal (or virtual) reality for the viewer. Bazin introduces photography with<br />
a discussion of cave paintings and Egyptian mummification. These practices,<br />
he claims, reveal the primal motives of artistic representation. He justifies this<br />
strange comparison by claiming our ancestors sought to overcome space and<br />
time by preserving appearances. In other words, to control life by<br />
constructing an idealized, artificial environment. Though concerned at this<br />
point with the plastic arts, from an historical perspective Bazin has<br />
approached the crux of photography and the technologies supporting it.<br />
While the comparison of mummies to photographs may stretch our powers<br />
of analysis, we can find other representational practices in ancient cultures<br />
which do not.<br />
Land surveying has been a profession for over six thousand years. First<br />
invented in Sumer and spreading quickly to Egypt, it emerged as one of the<br />
essential technologies of civilization, and it underlies virtually every advance<br />
in urban culture, technical representation and mass communication. It is a<br />
critical form of organized perception, but its contributions to society are<br />
often overlooked. Neither cities nor social hierarchies could exist without<br />
surveyors and the property boundaries they create. Estates, buildings, roads,<br />
and aqueducts all depend on the related acts of surveying, planning and<br />
impressing new designs into the earth.<br />
Bazin described mummification as a primal impulse behind photography,<br />
but study of surveying provides far more insight. Beyond the fact that optics<br />
derived from geometric investigation, surveying also plays the preservative<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
role described by Bazin. Since ancient times surveyors have preserved the<br />
state and its social organization by defining property boundaries. Herodotus’s<br />
description of ancient Egyptian land surveyors is no less apt today.<br />
For this cause Egypt was intersected. The king moreover (so<br />
they said) divided the country among all the Egyptians by<br />
giving each an equal square parcel of land, and made this his<br />
source of revenue, appointing the payment of a yearly tax.<br />
And any man who was robbed by the river of a part of his<br />
land would come to Sesostris and declare what had befallen<br />
him; then the king would send men to look into it and<br />
measure the space by which the land was divided, so that<br />
thereafter it should pay in proportion to the tax originally<br />
imposed. From this, to my thinking, the Greeks originally<br />
learnt the art of measuring land.<br />
Like photography, surveying was invented to extend perceptual powers.<br />
Urban planners could not comprehend the expanses necessary to build cities<br />
and empires, and surveying was the first in a long series of perceptual<br />
technologies invented to create objective, accurate images of the<br />
environment. It functioned as the eyes and visual memory of the early<br />
megamachine, a state bureaucracy that created specialized labor and social<br />
hierarchy. In contrast to cave paintings or mummification, the goal of<br />
surveying and related practices is to inform, not to express aesthetic or ritual<br />
values. At the core of a survey map is data, a representation of visual space<br />
which conveys useful information.<br />
We should keep in mind that visual representations are not necessarily<br />
pictorial. Archaic survey records, or cadastres, do not contain visual<br />
representations; they are nothing more than tables of measurements which, if<br />
associated with a particular area, describe a plot of land. In form and content<br />
they resemble digital databases which exist for the same purpose. However,<br />
by 2300 BCE an interesting parallel to the evolution of digital computing<br />
occurs in Mesopotamia. Cadastres had been growing in both size and detail<br />
since their invention in the fourth millennium, and an unknown surveyor in<br />
the service of the great UR III bureaucracy introduced an innovative means<br />
to displaying geometric data: a graphic interface. We would now call this<br />
device a map. 6 Survey maps developed rapidly within Mesopotamia,<br />
becoming a means to manipulate land through urban planning. Maps were<br />
used to manage estates, design buildings and govern cities. (See Figure 4)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Much like the modern GUI, the cadastral map appealed to the innate<br />
capacities of human vision. While tables continued to exist, then as now, the<br />
map was a preferred means of displaying complex environmental data in<br />
some situations.<br />
Figure 4: An UR III Empire survey map, dating from approximately 2300 BCE<br />
(Nissen, 1993)<br />
Another telling parallel exists between archaic and contemporary civilizations.<br />
When placed alongside an early cadastral map, an aerial photograph reveals<br />
the origins and purpose of our quintessentially modern art. (See Figure 5)<br />
Both present an expanse of land, and both achieve geometric accuracy by<br />
assuming an ideal aerial perspective. More importantly, both are directed at<br />
the same purpose: the comprehension and management of productive earth.<br />
Despite the distance of time, the Mesopotamian scribes who staffed the first<br />
bureaucracies would have understood the function and purpose of our late<br />
model GIS computers, the Geographic Information Systems that overlay<br />
representations of land with useful information about productivity, access<br />
and ownership. 7 (See Figure 6)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Figure 5: An aerial photograph (Space Imaging EOSAT Notes, 1997)<br />
Bazin’s recognition that the photograph is a model for reality, as well as an<br />
objective reality in its own right, aim at the core of photography and related<br />
practices. We often think of perception, visual or otherwise, as passive,<br />
oriented only toward accurate representation. Photography has often been<br />
treated in a similar manner, as a wax tablet supplying “truth at twenty-four<br />
times a second” but little more. But the ontology of truth tells only half the<br />
story. In practice neither vision nor photography has ever<br />
Figure 6: A GIS display<br />
Like the earliest survey maps, Geographic Information Systems display an image of terrain<br />
overlaid with information such as ownership, usage, disposition of the soil. (Antenucci,<br />
1991)<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
been passive. Each supplies information as a means to action, and, like the<br />
related practices of surveying and architecture, each provides a medium for<br />
the redesign of the environment. Like life, which sustains its own biosphere,<br />
humanity generates a milieu friendly to its needs. Vision, architecture and the<br />
intermediate technologies of photography, surveying and planning are the<br />
means to creating a genuinely human environment.<br />
The Idiot King<br />
SURVEYING EMERGED WITH THE EARLY city-state, and it has served the cause<br />
of urban civilization ever since. The ancients did not have distinct concepts<br />
of technology, science and politics, but their ideologies, which are religious in<br />
nature, still reveal the essential relationships between their disciplines. Prior<br />
to urbanization, Mesopotamians adhered to animistic beliefs similar to those<br />
of contemporary tribes. After the advent of cities, they developed state<br />
ideologies based on the sovereignty of sky gods like Inanna and Ningursu.<br />
Divine sanction conferred legitimacy upon rulers, and worship occupied<br />
most ceremonies of state. Sky gods were associated with planets—Inanna rose<br />
with Venus—and their celestial vantage revealed their transcendent authority.<br />
Hovering over their lands, they were the lords of all they saw, and their<br />
followers built ziggurats as aerial vantages for divine supervision.<br />
Mesopotamian hymns capture the awe, and lack of privacy, early civilization<br />
felt before these symbols:<br />
It [the temple Eninnu] kept an eye on the country;<br />
no arrogant one could walk<br />
in its sight.<br />
awe of Eninnu<br />
covered all lands like a cloth. 8<br />
Toward [the temple] Shugalam, dread place<br />
the place from where [the god] Ningursu<br />
keeps an eye on all lands . . .<br />
Thrust against heaven<br />
is its dread halo,<br />
and over all lands hovers<br />
great awe of my house 9<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
The urban state has unfolded from the concept of the sky god, idealized as a<br />
tyrant who governs the earthly state through all-encompassing vision. Aerial<br />
perspective—conceived as a divine seat, but realized as the technology of<br />
surveying—was a key advance in the feasibility of state institutions.<br />
Surveying realizes the perspective of the Inanna and her ilk, and architecture<br />
embodies their creative will, which depended on their ability to view land<br />
from an objective vantage. From its first appearance in land surveying, the<br />
organization of vision has driven the development of optics, and the drive to<br />
merge individual and collective perception continues. Architecture and media<br />
both derive from the objective gaze, and the modern spy satellite, surveying<br />
the masses below, is its virtual embodiment. In non-political terms, we could<br />
say that photography arose from a concern with method. What is the proper<br />
way to represent the environment? Whether manifest in Sumerian surveying,<br />
Renaissance painting or aerial surveillance, this question bears on the<br />
aesthetic, political and scientific concerns surrounding perceptual<br />
technologies. Though technical in nature, it is wrapped in the institutions of<br />
power—property and architecture—that caused it to emerge.<br />
How do we define property as a practical concept? Sumerian religion<br />
provided the first transactive language, or code, for comprehending land in<br />
terms of legal ownership. Pre-urban societies assign landholdings according to<br />
organic need, and the size of plots are naturally limited by the ability of<br />
owners to manage an area. Sky gods owned the land beneath their gaze, and<br />
they conveyed ownership to select classes within society as a legal right. By<br />
underpinning the legal doctrine of ownership, the sky god constituted the<br />
state and simultaneously posed a perceptual problem to its adherents.<br />
Ownership demanded management, but Mesopotamian leaders could only<br />
comprehend small areas with their native faculties—an area big enough to<br />
feed themselves and their families. In order to govern larger areas, they<br />
needed to attain the perspective of the sky god. Land surveying solved their<br />
problem. By combining simple surveying techniques with advances in<br />
accounting, early managers could remotely manage their estates, an ability<br />
which greatly extended their capacity to rule. The priests of Mesopotamia<br />
used geometry to attain the vision of gods.<br />
In contemporary terms, we might call this action at a distance telepresence or<br />
virtual experience. The key to understanding why these terms apply lies in<br />
our definition of reality. If “real” means a visually correct image of a distant<br />
place, then they are certainly inappropriate. But if “real” describes an accurate<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
representation, then a bureaucrat reviewing survey maps surely has<br />
experienced a distant place in a meaningful way. Mathematical knowledge<br />
lies at the basis of perceptual technology, and the data generated by<br />
technology is independent of a particular display. We admire photographs for<br />
their resemblance to vision, but both photography and vision operate by<br />
decomposing a visual scene into components. We can hardly say that<br />
photographs carried within television signals, or a computers, have lost their<br />
identity. They have simply changed mode, a process that occurs when our<br />
brains translate retinal images into neural impulses.<br />
Geometry derived from conscious reflection on material practices. As a<br />
cognitive process, it is related to our ability to communicate and coordinate<br />
the self within society. Despite our singular feelings of value, self-awareness<br />
may have evolved as an outgrowth of language, perhaps simply to facilitate<br />
cooperation. But this does not mean consciousness is merely the capacity for<br />
symbolizing. Thought lacks direct instrumentality, arising as it does from the<br />
unique situation of the body in its environment. It is the awakening of<br />
symbol to itself, the realization of the capacity to communicate through<br />
structured discourse. Through its embodiment, its placement in a desiring<br />
body, consciousness projects thought onto its environment, understanding its<br />
surroundings through stories that reflect its awareness of self, situation and<br />
desire. Aside from sheer presence, which demands acknowledgment, the gap<br />
between situation and desire, between the real and the ideal, is the primary<br />
motive for conscious beings to communicate. We imagine a better situation,<br />
and then, with the aid of others, try to realize it. Individual desire calls society<br />
and its tools for communication into being.<br />
Millennia of social development preceded the relatively quick formation of<br />
the first city-states in Mesopotamia. It is not a given that archaic<br />
Mesopotamians were evolving toward urban civilization. Instead it seems<br />
likely that they confronted conditions such as drought which forced them<br />
into progressively smaller regions. Necessity demanded they create efficient<br />
organizations of production and distribution, and bureaucracy emerged to<br />
handle the administrative load. Sky gods emerged to consolidate<br />
Mesopotamian society within state institutions, and, though our society is<br />
more sophisticated, we are still realizing the consequences of Sumerian<br />
ideology.<br />
Ancient priests may have conceived social hierarchy, private property and<br />
land surveying as a religious exercise, but their practical intent was the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
maintenance of cities. These institutions have persisted until today, gaining<br />
in variety and complexity, but never losing the ideal form of legal sovereignty<br />
and unchallenged will. To be effective, Sumerian religion absorbed the<br />
natural sovereignty of individuals, who gradually became subjects of the state<br />
and its dictates. By appropriating taxes and labor, the state constituted itself<br />
as a corporate regime defined by the active surveillance of territory. The<br />
image of the sky god gained force over time, and it eventually entered the<br />
divinely ordained king whose will embodied the political state.<br />
Though symbolically concentrated in his body, the king could hardly manage<br />
every facet of daily administration. As a practical matter, the royal will and its<br />
divine legitimacy was dispersed among a hierarchy of officials. In many<br />
modern states, every individual bears some degree of legal sovereignty,<br />
though their liberty is constrained by law. In all states, property ownership is<br />
a key signifier of status, and it became the basis for the division of physical<br />
and cognitive labor. Property constituted the res publica by situating<br />
individuals within abstract mechanisms of hierarchy, land rights and surplus<br />
value. On this basis, the state and its institutions could organize themselves as<br />
virtual bodies, performing their duties in urban interiors according to rational<br />
divisions of labor. Surveying and bookkeeping documents mediated<br />
communication within states, sending information from the peripheries and<br />
directives from the center. As Herodotus notes, records migrated toward<br />
central locations, archives that contained virtual images of land. Maps,<br />
calendars and accounting tables became essential tools within complex civil<br />
societies, serving as percepts that greatly expanded the faculties of their users.<br />
Mediated by tablets, papyrus and pens, and transported throughout the<br />
nation, these representations became a sensory apparatus, one that supported<br />
the state through disciplined perceptions.<br />
Early technologies like surveying clarify the essence of later practices like<br />
photography, mass media and digital imagery. For centuries the<br />
Mesopotamians did not distinguish the representation of land from other<br />
forms of information. Aside from its tools of measure, geometry was not<br />
treated as a special discipline, and cadastres contained only written<br />
measurements accompanied by descriptions of location. Later sketches<br />
displayed the same prosaic attitude, although it was no doubt difficult, if not<br />
impossible, to achieve visual effects on a clay tablet. But the first maps<br />
nonetheless transformed raw information into something resembling vision,<br />
and they inspired a transformation of the way we understand our visual<br />
environment.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
The transformation accelerated when the sciences of Mesopotamia and Egypt<br />
passed into Greece. A critical attitude evolved within Greek science, perhaps<br />
because thinkers tried to reconcile alternative systems. By the sixth century<br />
BCE, Greek artists began to display a concern with realism, and we see the<br />
beginning of furious philosophic debates over proper representation.<br />
Investigations into visual truth began emanating from workshops and<br />
academies, and over centuries painters adapted the techniques of perspective,<br />
laying the foundation for optical science. Greek investigations into scientific<br />
representation culminated in Euclid’s Geometry and Optics, which were<br />
completed in the third century BCE.<br />
Among their many accomplishments, Euclid’s mathematical studies reconcile<br />
the dualism that plagued Platonic philosophy. Plato denigrated perception<br />
because the shifting appearances of things contradicted what we know. In<br />
mathematical terms, geometry describes what we know, and optics describes<br />
how we see. By deriving optics from geometry, Euclid demonstrated the<br />
validity of visual information. Vision distorts geometric space—it distorts<br />
reality—but it does so systematically. As any surveyor knows, by accounting<br />
for the effects of perspective, we can glean accurate data about visual objects.<br />
The obvious solution to Plato’s dilemma is to systematically relate optical<br />
“slices,” individual perspectives, to a coordinated, geometric whole.<br />
Thinkers from Claudius Ptolemy 10 to Rudolph Arnheim 11 have proposed<br />
something like Euclid’s schema, and <strong>Stephen</strong> Kosslyn’s work Image and Brain<br />
extends that work to the imagination. When we remember a visual image,<br />
the visual cortex hosts an event physiologically similar to actual perception.<br />
We may recall James Gibson’s arguments against mental imagery, but<br />
Kosslyn presents convincing experimental evidence for pictorialism and the<br />
matter should be closed. 12 However, we can still query the human visual<br />
system, questioning why it evolved as it did. Could we have evolved a<br />
“sightless vision,” the cybernetic vision Paul Virilio describes in The Vision<br />
Machine? We sometimes perceive without sensation, as when we<br />
automatically block a stray ball. There are alternative forms of visual<br />
perception that do not rely in internal representation, for instance, in<br />
computers that use neural nets for navigation. The human brain is often<br />
described as a neural net. Could consciousness have evolved differently?<br />
What role does preconscious processing play in our responses? How does<br />
vision relate to faculties like language?<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Visualization became important when Paleolithic toolmakers began working<br />
together. Unlike most animals, humans have few inborn skills, so their<br />
survival depends on creativity and learning. Even when chipping rudimentary<br />
knives, early humans needed mental conceptions, and probably verbal<br />
descriptions, to guide their activities. Speech and imagination sufficed to<br />
organize society until the advent of city-states, when large projects demanded<br />
precise and durable forms of visualization. Thousands of workers often<br />
contributed to a project, and monumental works could not be built without<br />
coordinating (and subordinating) their judgment. Leaders needed objective<br />
standards to manage projects, and they invented the disciplines of<br />
measurement and quantitative analysis. Perceptual technologies coordinated<br />
the social body, allowing large groups to behave as one. While planning<br />
scribes would gather physical data such as size, weight and volume. They<br />
would then devise schedules by analyzing productivity, available labor and<br />
other factors. Deployed within a social body, geometric representation<br />
formed a matrix of objective perception, and the mechanical accuracy of<br />
surveyors enabled the functioning of social technics, the megamachine<br />
described by Mumford.<br />
And what of our human art? Must we not say in building it<br />
produces an actual house, and in painting a house of a different<br />
sort, as it were a man-made dream for waking eyes?<br />
Plato, “The Sophist”<br />
I have described perceptual technologies as activities that coordinate an<br />
autonomous social body. But, from the individual standpoint, the products<br />
of surveying and related technologies create far more than external pictures.<br />
They constitute institutions, and they structure society by defining relations<br />
of property, administration and commerce. Unlike natural vision, which<br />
views the environment as a continuum, perceptual technologies couple<br />
attention to social boundaries consisting of laws, architecture, contracts,<br />
receipts and deadlines. By organizing perception into an objective whole,<br />
they create a secondary environment based on institutional rather than<br />
individual imperatives. Property lines, buildings, calendars—none of these<br />
are pregiven in experience. They are human creations that reenact nature.<br />
Subjectivity and objectivity take on new meanings in this context. Like<br />
geometry and optics, they refer to strategies of political organization, not<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
scientific truths. Taking the state as an analytic condition, we might speculate<br />
on the next stage of perceptual technology. Surveying produced perspective,<br />
which in turn led to photography and television. Engineers are already<br />
producing immersive digital environments, some of which may do away with<br />
cameras and material displays. Direct neural couplings will be widely<br />
available in the foreseeable future. Scientists have already bypassed eyes and<br />
ears, and advanced haptic interfaces could simulate the balance of senses.<br />
There is no reason to feed real-world camera images into a neural coupling—<br />
digital environments would work just as well. Artists and engineers have<br />
already started designing imaginary spaces, giving us a taste of possible future<br />
environments. (See Figure 7) In a stable virtual world, neurally induced<br />
experiences could collapse the opposition between subject and object, along<br />
with distinctions among vision, photography and architecture. As our senses<br />
adapted to the new environment, culture might evade nature altogether,<br />
referring only to itself. What sort of societies might evolve in such a space?<br />
Figure 7: A Virtual Space<br />
Designed by the NOX studio in Rotterdam, this virtual space is accessed through head<br />
mounted goggles. Within a few years, the environment may be accessed through direct<br />
neural coupling between the brain and the computer which generates it. (Zellner, 1999)<br />
Strict control of virtual worlds could create a kind of planetary dungeon.<br />
Economics would dictate the rhythm of daily life, which would be governed<br />
by a central body according to laws of consumption and production.<br />
Freedom could be severely curtailed in this environment, which might<br />
resemble a digital version of Jeremy Bentham’s panopticon. Proposed in the<br />
eighteenth century, the panopticon was designed as an ideal prison which<br />
concealed nothing from the guards. Misbehavior was unlikely in such a place.<br />
More advanced technologies are beginning to impose a similar effect on<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
society at large. Surveillance cameras blanket most cities, and authorities are<br />
using computer networks to increase their effectiveness. Complemented by<br />
satellite-based surveillance, an immersive cyberspace could completely<br />
assimilate individual faculties to objective data. Privacy would be impossible<br />
since every perception would be controlled, even witnessed. Videotapes in<br />
arcade games capture the completeness of digital surveillance. People can<br />
either join the game, or they can observe it from the perspective of one or<br />
more players.<br />
On the other hand, these same technologies could celebrate an extreme form<br />
of individuality. A wave of progress in genetics and engineering could take<br />
humanity well beyond its current state, and, driven by the urge for selffulfillment,<br />
an elite, or perhaps an entire society, might decide to fuse with<br />
machines and retreat into cyberspace. Here they would develop a poetics of<br />
technology, crafting experience with unlimited mental resources. 13 Freed<br />
from productive labor, these cyborgs might reject the objective order<br />
altogether. Imagination would become the organizing principle of experience.<br />
(See Figure 8) It may be difficult to sustain a collective under such<br />
conditions, particularly if companionship could be provided by one’s own<br />
creations. Unchecked individualism could break down society, creating a<br />
future bizarrely reminiscent of myth. Living in a programmed environment,<br />
bodies and the world could assume any shape, support any whimsy.<br />
Computers would then plunge individuals into a kind of idiocy—immersed<br />
in technology they would be playmates who met only for companionship. Or<br />
who never met at all. Confined to their individual worlds, each person would<br />
exist as a mechanical god, an idiot king presiding over a terrain of<br />
information.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Figure 8: Architecture of the Future<br />
Marcos Novak designs virtual environments according to poetics rather than gravity.<br />
Unencumbered by mass and utility, they function as fantastic playgrounds for the mind.<br />
(Zellner, 1999)<br />
The scenarios outlined above describe the polar tendencies toward freedom<br />
and tyranny inherent within perceptual technologies, the machines we use for<br />
observation and communication. As a concept, the sky god displays both<br />
tendencies, and, when applied within society as an ideology, it creates the<br />
primal existential dilemma. What is the role of the individual within society?<br />
The previous scenarios represent extreme possibilities in the development of<br />
media, and we can hope that society evolves within their balance. It is hard to<br />
predict what scenario may come to pass. Biotechnology is advancing more<br />
quickly than we would have imagined even ten years ago, and engineers are<br />
busy devising new ways to reconstruct our senses. Already we largely dwell<br />
within a virtual reality, an artificial world enclosed by architecture, media and<br />
telecommunication. But we may never build a completely cybernetic world,<br />
preferring to simply augment natural perception with layers of information.<br />
The sky god can model transcendent freedom, or it can subsume the<br />
individual to a corporate will. We see within it the modern individual who<br />
uses machines to control destiny. In the beginning this power was wielded<br />
only by kings, but, since the beginning of urbanization, more and more<br />
individuals have gained the power to structure their world. Personal liberty<br />
has never been greater except perhaps in certain tribal cultures. At the same<br />
time, the ability of central authorities to control expression, movement and<br />
now biology has advanced immeasurably, and we always stand on the brink<br />
of totalitarianism. Whether concrete or digital, our cities embody the creative<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
gaze and the architectural will of the sky gods. Though our kings have lost<br />
divine right, we have launched the sky god into orbit, just as the Sumerians<br />
conceived. The constant presence of surveillance cameras, whether hanging<br />
from buildings or satellites, should remind us of the potency of such vision,<br />
and how it might alter our environment. However it evolves, virtual reality<br />
will bear the imprint, and the dangers, of the ideal state and the vision of the<br />
gods.<br />
References<br />
Antenucci, John (1991) with Kay Brown, Peter Croswell and <strong>Michael</strong><br />
Kevany. Geographic Information Systems: An Introduction to the Technology.<br />
New York: Van Nostrand Rheinhold.<br />
Arnheim, Rudolph (1969) Visual Thinking. Berkely, CA: 1969.<br />
Bazin, Andre (1967) ‘Ontology of the Photograph’ in Trachtenberg, Alan,<br />
(ed.) Classic Essays on Photography. New Haven, CN: Lee’s Island Books:<br />
237-245.<br />
Crary, Jonathon. (1990) Techniques of the Observer: On Vision and Modernity<br />
in the Nineteenth Century. Boston, MA: MIT Press.<br />
Euclid (1908) The Thirteen Books of The Elements. Sir Thomas Heath (trans.)<br />
New York: Dover Publications.<br />
Euclid (1945) Optics in The Journal of the Optical Society of America 35 (5):<br />
357-372.<br />
Fried, Itzhak, Christof Koch and Gabriel Kreiman (2000) Nature 408<br />
(6810): 357 – 361.<br />
Gernsheim, Helmut and Alison (1955) The History of Photography from the<br />
Earliest Use of the Camera Obscura up to 1914. London: Oxford University<br />
Press.<br />
Gibson, James J. (1968) The Senses Considered as Perceptual Systems. London:<br />
George Allen & Unwin.<br />
Herodotus (1992) The Histories. trans. George Rawlinson. London, UK: The<br />
Guernsey Press.<br />
Jakobsen, Thorkild (1987) The Harp that Once . . . New Haven, CT: Yale<br />
University Press.<br />
Kosslyn, <strong>Stephen</strong> (1994) Image and Brain. Boston: MIT Press.<br />
Lindberg, David C. (1976) Theories of Vision: From Al-Kindi to Kepler.<br />
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
Mumford, Lewis (1966) The Myth of the Machine: Technics and Human<br />
Development. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.<br />
Nissen, Hans (1993), Robert K. Englund and Peter Damerow. Archaic<br />
Bookkeeping. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />
Ptolemy, Claudius. The Geography. New York: Dover Publications, 1991.<br />
Sabra, A. I. (1989) Ibn al-Haytham’s Optics. London: The Warburg Institute.<br />
Space Imaging EOSAT Notes, Spring 1997<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong>s, Ferris. J. (1953) “A Surveyor’s Map of a Field.” Journal of<br />
Cuneiform Studies 7 (1) 1953.<br />
Virilio, Paul (1995) The Vision Machine. Bloomington, IN: The Indiana<br />
University Press.<br />
Wald, George (1953) ‘Eye and Camera’ in Scientific American Reader. NY:<br />
Simon & Schuster: 555-68.<br />
Zellner, Peter (1999) Hybrid Space: New Forms on Digital Architecture. New<br />
York.<br />
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />
I would like to thank Douglas Kellner of UCLA, Robert Solomon of<br />
University of Texas at Austin and Steve Best of the University of Texas at El<br />
Paso for their comments and encouragement.<br />
Notes<br />
1<br />
Sabra, A. I. (1989) Ibn al-Haytham’s Optics. London: The Warburg<br />
Institute.<br />
2<br />
This important episode on the history of optics has often been misconstrued<br />
by modern commentators, for example, in Techniques of the Observer (Crary,<br />
1990: 27, 35, 38). In support of his statements, Crary cites David Lindberg.<br />
Crary seems to have missed the conclusion of Lindberg’s argument. At one<br />
point, Lindberg states that Kepler was familiar with the argument that an<br />
earlier attempt to construe the eye as a camera obscura. But on the next page,<br />
the comparison capitulates to a powerful counter-argument (Lindberg 1976:<br />
182-206). Other inaccuracies in Crary’s work include the surprising assertion<br />
that Euclid and Aristotle were familiar with the pinhole effect (Crary, 1990:<br />
27).<br />
3<br />
Wald, George (1953) ‘Eye and Camera’ in Scientific American Reader. NY:<br />
Simon & Schuster: pp. 555-68.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Ali Hossaini<br />
4<br />
Research in this area has made great strides. Scientists at both the University<br />
of North Carolina and MIT have developed retinal implants that carry<br />
impulses from a camera directly to the optic nerve, temporarily giving limited<br />
vision to blind people. Reports are available in the websites of their respective<br />
universities.<br />
5<br />
Bazin, Andre (1967) “Ontology of the Photograph” in Trachtenberg, Alan,<br />
(ed.) Classic Essays on Photography. New Haven, CN: Lee’s Island Books: pp.<br />
237-245.<br />
6<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong>s, Ferris. J. (1953) “A Surveyor’s Map of a Field.” Journal of<br />
Cuneiform Studies 7 (1) 1953 and Nissen, Hans (1993), Robert K. Englund<br />
and Peter Damerow. Archaic Bookkeeping. Chicago: University of Chicago<br />
Press.<br />
7<br />
Antenucci, John (1991) with Kay Brown, Peter Croswell and <strong>Michael</strong><br />
Kevany. Geographic Information Systems: An Introduction to the Technology.<br />
New York: Van Nostrand Rheinhold.<br />
8<br />
Jakobsen, Thorkild (1987) The Harp that Once . . . New Haven, CT: Yale<br />
University Press, p 422.<br />
9<br />
Ibid., pp. 398-400.<br />
10<br />
Ptolemy, Claudius. The Geography. New York: Dover Publications, 1991.<br />
11<br />
Arnheim, Rudolph (1969) Visual Thinking. Berkely, CA: 1969.<br />
12<br />
UCLA neurosurgeon Itzhak Fried and a team of researchers reported in<br />
Nature that the mind's eye—the imagination or mental view—generates<br />
mental pictures by using the same neurons that were activated when it saw<br />
the object or image. “Our study reveals that the same brain cells that fire<br />
when a person looks at a picture of the Mona Lisa are, in fact, the same<br />
neurons that excite when that person is asked to imagine the Mona Lisa.”<br />
(Fried, 2000)<br />
13<br />
Zellner, Peter (1999) Hybrid Space: New Forms on Digital Architecture.<br />
New York.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
A<br />
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
Fiction<br />
The Other Side *<br />
by<br />
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
t first only a few of us noticed, and we didn’t talk about it until later—<br />
though most of us probably tried to check with someone early on. I know<br />
I did. Putting it as a matter of curiosity, in passing, but seriously, the way you<br />
might ask “Have you ever had a dream where you dreamed you woke up?” But<br />
of course, in that case, a lot of people say yes, and the others at least know<br />
what you mean.<br />
All in all, it seemed like a good idea just to move on. Everything else was okay.<br />
Well, nothing was actually okay, because it was happening to everything, but<br />
nothing else was happening to anything, that’s the point. So you could adjust.<br />
I mean, if one day you woke up and everything in the world was yellow, it<br />
would definitely be weird. But after awhile you might be able to just say “Hey,<br />
one-color world,” and go about your business. But that comparison doesn’t<br />
really work because there would be major confusion in some areas, like<br />
recognizing beverages, if everything was yellow. Anyway, in the actual case,<br />
most of us made the adjustment and moved on.<br />
Except that, after awhile, it got more—pronounced, would be a good word.<br />
At first, you were only glimpsing the edges of the other side of things. And<br />
even those were in hazy outline, like a degraded holograph. So you weren’t<br />
100% sure that you hadn’t been seeing them all along, but just hadn’t noticed.<br />
Sort of like, when you feel a slight pain or ache, you sometimes think that<br />
maybe it has been with you for some time after all. Or as if you realized,<br />
through some accidental circumstance, that your peripheral vision was broader<br />
than you had realized up until now. Only, of course, your periphery wasn’t the<br />
issue in this case.<br />
* With acknowledgments to Edmund Husserl.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
So you could still tell jokes and enjoy life for a certain time, even as it became<br />
definite that your view of the other side of things was extending further and<br />
getting more solid. Color and texture, and so on. Some people stuck it out<br />
longer than others, though. Because it did get harder to cope.<br />
In the early days, I went to a lot of movies. So did other people, I noticed. It<br />
was because things in the movies don’t have any thickness to see around. So<br />
everything in the movies stayed normal, or as normal as things in the movies<br />
ever were. So it was quite a relief to go to the movies.<br />
But later on, as the whole process advanced, and people were starting to lose it<br />
publicly and you really had to suck it up and hang tough just to navigate, I<br />
stopped going to the movies. It was too heartbreaking, the discrepancy. For<br />
me it was. When you went outside afterwards there was just no ignoring how<br />
drastic the change was. You couldn’t help but notice that you were seeing a lot<br />
of the other side of everything. The disparity was so stark. For me anyway, the<br />
movies caused this intense longing for the simpler times I had taken for<br />
granted, so I stopped going.<br />
But plenty of people reacted the opposite. They went more and more often.<br />
They went from one stall in the multiplex to the other to the other. If they<br />
could afford it. The movie theater people began to make sure that people<br />
bought another ticket each time, though. But they also began to stay open 24<br />
hours, which was good for people who could afford it. And they built more of<br />
them too.<br />
Other people stayed in their rooms a lot, in the dark with the TV or the VCR.<br />
After a certain point, the TV—the live TV—got really strange, though. There<br />
had obviously been some policy decision, and live TV people continued to<br />
pretend that nothing had changed. It got more and more obvious that they<br />
were pretending. You could see them trying not to look at things around them<br />
on the set. And they began to stare at their own monitors much more, to<br />
communicate with each other through the screens on the set much more. You<br />
could see that it was getting to be a struggle for them too. Not good to watch.<br />
Not helpful.<br />
But just the VCR could be really good. If you had just the VCR on, and the<br />
rest of the room was dark, it was almost completely okay. You knew where<br />
stuff was, just being guided by shadowy shapes was enough, and everything felt<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
the same, so you could really be almost completely normal in a darkly<br />
shadowed room. That’s why so many people just went ahead and put out their<br />
eyes in the later stages. Many did it in groups. They ritualized it and,<br />
afterwards, when they were all together, touching in the dark, they could really<br />
say good-bye. Except that some of those groups went into panic, so that was a<br />
gamble too. Any way you chose was going to be a gamble.<br />
It wasn’t transparency, that’s the what you think when it’s first described, that<br />
things are going transparent, starting at the edges and then spreading further<br />
around. That wouldn’t have been a comfortable experience either, of course,<br />
but at least it’s conceivable. I remember once, when things were pretty well<br />
advanced but not up to any major threshold, some of us were starting to form<br />
groups, and we were talking to this woman who was still insisting that she<br />
didn’t notice anything specific, just a mood of disorientation. A lot of people<br />
went through a long stage of that, by the way. Something like that famous<br />
psychology experiment where you give people playing cards that are normal<br />
except the hearts are colored black and the clubs are colored red. People just go<br />
ahead and play poker or canasta or whatever, apparently without noticing. But<br />
their blood pressure and galvanic skin responses go haywire, and they get<br />
irritable and anxious and they want to stop playing all the time, but they never<br />
realize why. Sort of like that, except of course, you couldn’t stop playing in<br />
this case.<br />
Anyway, about this woman, I’m pretty sure she was just in denial. Her body<br />
language had that wound-up stretching quality and her eyes tended to rest at<br />
unlikely angles on the sky or some other blank expanse. When she had to deal<br />
directly with your face or with some object, her eyes had that stare-right-past-it<br />
look that allowed you to see something just enough to be able to use it<br />
without acknowledging it particularly. But I couldn’t be sure, of course; you<br />
couldn’t see what other people were seeing, so you could never be sure.<br />
Anyway, we were trying to describe it to her and she seemed to be trying to<br />
understand. She kept saying things like “You mean things are getting thinner<br />
and you can see through them?”<br />
She was trying to strike a bargain. If we would accept her description, she<br />
might be willing to admit the whole business. Otherwise, she wasn’t going to<br />
see it. But our group was committed. We were not one of the soft groups.<br />
That’s not it, we said, you just see around, you see the other side. But that’s<br />
impossible, she kept saying, my eyes are on this side. That was the big item for<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
her, her own eyes—her outlook, so to speak. Sometimes she would touch her<br />
eyes. People like her didn’t last.<br />
But transparent things were good to look at, by the way. At least at first they<br />
were. Especially if whatever was around you wasn’t distinct from other things<br />
around you. Like in a room with the same wall paper all over, or sitting in the<br />
bushes. Then you could see the beginnings of the other side of the transparent<br />
thing—say a glass ball—but what you saw through it wasn’t that different<br />
from what you saw through your side, so the overall experience was pretty<br />
normal. When things got more advanced, though, you didn’t ever want to<br />
look at a transparent thing, of course. Or mirrors.<br />
Rushing water, say in fountains or waterfalls, was good too. Also fire. Seeing<br />
the other side of them was like seeing more of the same. But more. That<br />
feeling you used to get in normal times, watching a stream or campfire—the<br />
same feeling, but richer. That kind of thing became a point of pride for the<br />
hard groups. Others might gather under some phony explanation, but, in the<br />
hard groups, you were expected to meet it straight on and even revel in it. It<br />
was this feeling that, if you could just ride it, go with it—then you would reap<br />
some reward. And also the feeling that it didn’t matter what you did anyway,<br />
so you might as well enjoy it for as long as you could. You can see the machomasochism<br />
potential. The ultimate analogy would be jumping off a really tall<br />
building and deciding to enjoy the fall.<br />
So when we discovered intense experience enhancements, like rushing water or<br />
fires, we spent hours extolling the sensations and our own daring. Actually, I<br />
didn’t last with my hard group past a certain point. It got too forced. But it<br />
was a brave choice, you have to admit that.<br />
Another good thing was to be in the desert or by the ocean. Wide open spaces,<br />
in other words. If you looked into the distance and not at your immediate<br />
surroundings, well, the effect of expansion and release that you got in normal<br />
times had only been a muffled intimation. Large objects in the distance,<br />
mountains, say, and, most of all, the horizon itself on a clear day, the folding<br />
over and around of one’s vision on so grand a scale—it was like a dream of<br />
flying, soaring, but you were a great flock.<br />
So a lot of people gathered on beaches and deserts. When these places started<br />
to jam up, of course it defeated the purpose. There were crowd control<br />
problems, sanitation and so on—so that whole movement didn’t last long.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
Some people just went out in boats, just went out to sea with supplies. I don’t<br />
know how it went for them in the later stages.<br />
And, yes, night got to be very welcome. That became when most people went<br />
out and mingled and did their errands. Of course, there had always been a<br />
welcome kind of night, the kind that comes after a really oppressive hot day,<br />
with gentle breezes stirring the trees in the dark around you when you step<br />
outside. Night in general got to be more like that. The dawn got to be what<br />
you dreaded. On some level, you kept expecting things to be alright again<br />
when you woke up. But they never were. That was bad.<br />
In the last stages, the only way you knew the difference between your side and<br />
the other side of anything was through your body habits. If you let it alone,<br />
your body knew what it would feel if you touched a thing—for example, that<br />
you would get a grip on the handle if you reached for the cup this way or that.<br />
But you had to take it for granted. That’s what I learned the hard way from<br />
being with someone when he started to touch things just for the reassurance.<br />
Once he began to do that, he got into this guessing game with himself about<br />
which side was facing his body and very quickly lost his ability to distinguish<br />
between the sides. In one afternoon, actually. I tried to distract him when I<br />
realized what was happening, but he was locked in by then. He would guess<br />
right a few times, and the relief would start to flow, and the desire for more<br />
relief would drive him to another flurry of touching, at which point, of course,<br />
he would miss a few and the fear would come back in that “Oh, god, please,<br />
not again” way that can be so wearing—and back he would go to testing,<br />
lining things up one by one after he had figured out with his hands which side<br />
was which, trying to memorize for each thing which side was which so that<br />
maybe he could learn how to tell the difference again. Impossible to do it that<br />
way, of course. It was a knack.<br />
When he started trying to get me to help him figure it out, I had to cut him<br />
loose. There was no way I could risk it. But that’s how I learned the<br />
importance of taking it for granted in my actions that I knew which side was<br />
which.<br />
Connected with this was not looking at any part of your own body—<br />
obviously never in a mirror, but also not in the course of your routine<br />
activities. The key parts to avoid were your hands and forearms, above all, but<br />
also your feet and legs if you had to look down for some reason. Luckily, this<br />
requirement dovetailed with learning how use your eyes in a general way to<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
supervise overall performance, locating things, selecting what to reach for and<br />
so on, and then letting your hands do the detail work. So you would need to<br />
be letting your body habits determine which side of a thing you were on at<br />
exactly the very instant when you needed to turn your eyes away so as not to<br />
see your own limbs. You got in this groove of looking away just as you<br />
reached out or stepped down or whatever it was. That coincidence of<br />
requirements was really what made it possible to continue functioning in the<br />
later stages.<br />
Touching your own body parts, on the other hand, as opposed to looking at<br />
them, was probably the most grounding thing you could do. Touching<br />
anything was good, of course. That quickly became the source of your<br />
moment-to-moment faith. If you had ever wondered how blind people could<br />
possibly “read” those little Braille dots in the elevator, you didn’t wonder<br />
anymore! Stroking and holding things in public was acceptable right from the<br />
beginning. You could continue to conduct normal transactions with someone<br />
who was doing that—it didn’t really disrupt the interaction any more than if<br />
they had an unusual haircut, say, or an especially striking fashion accessory. But<br />
touching your own body parts was different because it wasn’t so easy to<br />
overlook in social situations, so for a long time people mostly did that in<br />
private or at least in the dark. Then it became okay to do in crowds, because of<br />
the anonymity. In the end, it didn’t matter any more and people did whatever<br />
they needed to do.<br />
Of course, if you were just rubbing your hands together or stroking your arms<br />
or keeping them folded snugly, that was okay anywhere right from the<br />
beginning. It just got more common. What wasn’t publicly acceptable for a<br />
long time was feeling slowly all over and around as far as possible, the way<br />
people learned to do almost by instinct, feeling not just with your hands but<br />
with your arms, and especially all over your face and head, and your legs and<br />
feet feeling each other, and also pressing your back, your spine, really hard<br />
against something solid. Your spine became very important.<br />
Reciprocal touching in social situations, handshaking and so on, that ended<br />
quickly. It led to clinging and violence. Besides, there were pairs and groups<br />
forming everywhere for all that. Almost everyone who lasted gravitated into<br />
the touching groups during the last stages. But, though comforting, such<br />
groups were risky, subject to obsessive pacts or outbursts of impulse that<br />
couldn’t be contained. The most durable groups prohibited both looking and<br />
touching, relying instead on conversation—and, of course, the singing. They<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Thomas de Zengotita<br />
stayed together and found some peace, right up to the end. I was in one of<br />
those groups, thank God. It just worked out that way, by accidental<br />
encounter. We gave ourselves in gratitude to music, and to words, which took<br />
no sides. We dwelt together in our voices and the stories that we told, stories<br />
of our world remembered. There were many beautiful moments.<br />
Thomas de Zengotita is a contributing editor at Harper's magazine. He teaches<br />
at The Dalton School and at the Draper Graduate Program at New York<br />
University. His most recent essay, "The Romance of Empire," appeared in<br />
Harper's, July 2003. "Hannah's Birthday" is forthcoming in Fiction, Summer<br />
2003. He is working on a book for Bloomsbury called Mediated, due out in the<br />
Fall of 2004.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Two Poems<br />
by<br />
Andy Clausen<br />
WCW BLUES<br />
Sexual lust may weaken me<br />
but I've always come back<br />
to my senses<br />
Sweet Free Emotion<br />
no one is corny<br />
here Sister, Brother<br />
It permeates!<br />
It melds and it<br />
coats and immerses<br />
It entwines<br />
and conceives<br />
It is gestating<br />
It is birthing!<br />
It's composing<br />
It's decomposing<br />
It has become<br />
One with<br />
the language!<br />
Young I felt<br />
I felt It<br />
I felt young<br />
With the super special<br />
extra souled tenacity<br />
of beneficial madmen<br />
That It, Yes It<br />
would come easy<br />
easy as sunrise<br />
We're not just talking<br />
Andy Clausen<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
lessed by the Muse<br />
here<br />
We're talking<br />
All Out<br />
Eternal Verse<br />
We're talking<br />
The Best<br />
The Best Ever<br />
I didn't want to quit<br />
my day job<br />
for a literary prize<br />
at South Sophomore State<br />
nor a token wild man be<br />
at the Festival of Squares<br />
Andy Clausen<br />
When I wrote tragedy<br />
It was earth shaking<br />
It was Epic<br />
You may have seen an oafish pretentious<br />
unlearned freak<br />
a trouble maker<br />
A bombed comedian<br />
a no literary value boor<br />
with severe problems<br />
Last night I tried to take a bottle of Rum<br />
to the Clear Light<br />
I am no longer possessed of an extra soul<br />
Those tragedies and lonelinesses I romanticized<br />
are real and pathetic<br />
The entire reason I deal with the outward show<br />
this Maya this supposed life<br />
in front of me<br />
The melodrama of art<br />
The death in life<br />
The purpose and cause<br />
Is aching like a mother fucker<br />
Now I know they really were against us<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Andy Clausen<br />
They had scorn and repugnance for the poor<br />
They didn't want their literature<br />
open to the creole cultures<br />
the underground metaphor<br />
They really didn't want the lower classes<br />
to rise<br />
Okay cartoonize, abstract, or use us<br />
rise as an individual maybe<br />
but as a class never<br />
This must be the working class writer blues<br />
This must be the working class blues<br />
This must the working class<br />
This must be the blues<br />
INSIDE OTISVILLE<br />
First in-class writing<br />
at the correctional facility<br />
(State Prison)<br />
I see 11 men--- 11 good men<br />
How do I know they're good?<br />
How does anyone know---<br />
I see the concertina wire, its cutting music<br />
I can't hear, only see<br />
I see the mind of a heart<br />
jump out of a hand<br />
the dream not deferred<br />
but exploding<br />
a load lightened by a gram<br />
an ounce a mote a speck<br />
and the heavy load is carried by<br />
a body that is not mine<br />
any longer<br />
a ghost carrying a cross<br />
I dream refrigerators and big deep couches<br />
and free dentists and the time I'll be home<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
and her arms<br />
I will not share--- but somehow<br />
that embrace that breath<br />
living inside the breath<br />
It will survive and enter the waters<br />
Andy Clausen<br />
I see the faces I've seen in the bars<br />
the off track betting parlors<br />
and littered parks, that I've seen<br />
down in the rust and black smoke<br />
down in the alligator warehouses<br />
up again on that gold dust sidewalk<br />
in the car next to me entering the Mid<br />
Town Tunnel selling flowers, papers<br />
at the Tri-Boro toll booth<br />
The face on the working streets of South Ozone Park<br />
that catch my eyes and turn away as do mine<br />
I see a little stream of light with floating lint butterflies<br />
and milky ways of insect fragments<br />
A woman's face in a piece of bread<br />
a dead man's last words in the grain<br />
of the sidewalks<br />
the grey and the dull<br />
institutional green<br />
What does that mean?<br />
What is a mistake that is paid for?<br />
What is the price society has set?<br />
I'm not society---I don't even like society<br />
I want to live in the Future<br />
freedom is another chance<br />
freedom is a big black bird<br />
over the rooftops<br />
undaunted by the smoky grim spume<br />
of strange industry<br />
Evil is not human<br />
Let me 12 years old again be<br />
and I'll show you a different world<br />
destiny<br />
Let me live That<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
I would give you how the moon<br />
is high<br />
How it is free to do whatever it wants<br />
and the only sounds are<br />
water air insects wind<br />
the weeping leaves of grass<br />
the laughing of machineless nights<br />
A festival of sleep walking<br />
a dream not a dream<br />
Andy Clausen<br />
Andy Clausen is the author of nine books of poetry, including 40th Century<br />
Man: Selected Verse 1996-1966 (Autonomedia, 1997), and Without Doubt<br />
(Zeitgeist Press, 1991, introduction by Allen Ginsberg). A coeditor of Poems for<br />
the Nation (Seven Stories Press, 2000), Clausen is a construction worker and<br />
teaches poetry in public schools and prisons in New York.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
C<br />
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
Review<br />
Terror and Liberalism<br />
by Paul Berman<br />
reviewed by<br />
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
an’t we all just get along? If not, do you mind awfully if we do away with<br />
you? Paul Berman argues that realists and leftists alike ignore irrational<br />
forces—“pathological mass movements”—that motivate global violence. He<br />
accordingly urges that liberal Western societies intervene militarily to stamp<br />
out these threats with, as the venerable saying goes, extreme prejudice.<br />
Berman delves into the extraordinarily complex question of terrorism and, in<br />
so doing, displays a desperate need to occupy the middle ground no matter<br />
where it may be. This hoary tactic can place one in strange, and even silly,<br />
positions. Where exactly is the middle ground regarding mass murder or<br />
female circumcision or slavery? (Spartacists may be annoying extremists but<br />
was Spartacus an extremist?) So Berman prudently takes the precaution of<br />
controlling where he winds up by dictating where the loony left and right<br />
margins are supposedly set.<br />
In Terror and Liberalism Berman tirelessly reiterates whatever the mainstream<br />
American media finds fit to print. Saddam in 1991 was poised to roll over<br />
Saudi Arabia. Arab problems are internally generated because heaven forfend<br />
that anyone mention colonial legacies or neo-imperial ploys. Saddam “threw<br />
the inspectors out” in 1998 (when they were withdrawn under severe White<br />
House pressure). The U.S. consequently “complained from the sidelines”—<br />
from which it had infiltrated CIA agents into UNSCOM. Scapegoating is<br />
Saddam’s “special genius”—although CIA Director George Tenet may beg to<br />
differ these days.<br />
Saddam gassed “his own” people, although most Kurds, as the gory record<br />
over many decades shows, hardly viewed themselves as “his” people, or even<br />
as Iraqis. Gas, of course, evokes gasps of horror in the West, partly because<br />
the West cannot be accused of using it, at least not since the RAF lavishly<br />
gassed rebel Kurdish and Arab villages in the conveniently forgotten 1920s.<br />
Even so stodgy a journal as Foreign Affairs noted in 1999 that economic<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
sanctions have killed more people than all other weapons of mass destruction<br />
combined. Yet this daintier, distant form of death-dealing doesn’t appear to<br />
faze Berman, or most Westerners, at all. Berman knows, and plays to, his<br />
audience.<br />
Berman also recycles the tall tale that Clinton persuaded Barak to withdraw<br />
from “all but small portions of the West bank” so, accordingly, there is no<br />
rational “explanation for Arafat’s refusal of this magnanimous offer.”<br />
Palestinians do not want peace; ergo, they crave jihadic glory. Berman further<br />
speculates that they sought wider borders; a ravenous Palestinian imperialism<br />
clawing at Israel, or Lebanon or even New Jersey. As for Israel, anything<br />
short of Waffen SS behavior is construed as a heartwarming testament to its<br />
unparalleled humanity. Jenin was not Lidice; hence, the Israelis there<br />
accomplished a “breakthrough in relatively civilized army tactics.” Can<br />
Israelis, who hail the stand at Massada, really fail to grasp what happens to a<br />
populace which feels it has its back to the wall?<br />
Suicide bombers are a stunning inexplicable barbarity who “produced a<br />
philosophical crisis, among everyone around the world who wanted to believe<br />
that a rational logic governs the world,” says Berman. One can say much the<br />
same for many who watched the Bush team at work after 9/11. Berman<br />
seems to believe that the degree of civilization is measured by the distance at<br />
which a state neatly can kill. One gets the impression that if Palestinians had<br />
a nifty weapons lab devising remote control devices, Berman would think<br />
better of them. By contrast, Berman sees Israel as a perfectly reasonable<br />
liberal state, a judgment only about half of Israelis may grant him at any<br />
given time, depending on who is in charge.<br />
Berman laments that “war and hysteria” work to keep fearful citizens<br />
distracted and obedient, but he imagines this ancient formula applies only to<br />
Middle East tyrannies. Berman, like Christopher Hitchens, champions an<br />
“anti-totalitarian war” and, thus flatteringly framed, who but fools and tools<br />
of tyrants can object? The dark but distinct possibility that overtly noble wars<br />
really would be conducted according to realpolitik tenets and exploitative<br />
aims seems lost on Berman who likes to chide leftists who fret about<br />
“America’s imperial motives, about the greed of big corporations, and their<br />
influence in White House policy; and could not get beyond their worries.”<br />
Apparently after 9/11 no one was so depravedly partisan as to attach their<br />
own agenda to the security crisis for their own advantage. Pay no attention to<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
the man behind the curtain, Berman admonishes, watch the impressive<br />
fireworks and shut up.<br />
Berman is wary of realists, too. Realists figure that “world politics is driven by<br />
wealth, power, and geography” (although a lot of realists overlook the role of<br />
wealth). While it may be unwise to start or end with realist precepts about<br />
power, one cannot ignore them, as Berman does, when examining how the<br />
world works. To characterize the first Gulf War as fought in defense of<br />
Muslims in Kuwait and Saudi Arabia is mad hatter logic—like saying the<br />
U.S. cavalry wiped out the Indians to protect Chinese coolies toiling on the<br />
railroads. In this same vein, Berman imagines that America sided with the<br />
Palestinans. He even quotes an Israeli negotiator lauding Clinton for doing<br />
more for the Palestinians than any one else. It’s rather like a participant<br />
praising the diplomatic feats of Chamberlain at Munich.<br />
Turning to Islam after a brief detour through Camus, Berman contends that<br />
“pan-Arabism and the philosophical roots of Europe’s right wing<br />
nationalisms were the same.” Islamic extremism (unlike other religious<br />
extremisms?) preaches utter obedience to an unrealizable ideal, and so<br />
generates totalitarianism. Totalitarianism and terror are the same. So terror,<br />
as defined by the White House, is totalitarian. Naturally, Berman exempts<br />
state-sponsored terrorism. All progress, he also says, depended on “a freedom<br />
that recognizes the existence of other freedoms too.” This sounds okay, but<br />
he blithely proceeds to applaud “the idea of progress toward ever more<br />
freedom, ever more rationality, ever more wealth”—as if these pursuits were<br />
not difficult to coordinate, or were not contradictory.<br />
To sustain the pretty notion that liberal democratic societies cannot do<br />
systematically illiberal things, he predictably taps a “heart of darkness”<br />
argument about King Leopold’s atrocities in the Congo. There, liberal<br />
colonialists, evidently demented by the primitive milieu, took up “murder for<br />
murders sake.” No, it was murder for profit’s sake. They operated in environs<br />
where it was expeditious to work natives to death to extract resources quickly.<br />
Liberals aren’t immune to such tempting incentives. Why that would be<br />
irrational. One would never guess when reading Berman that the simpleminded<br />
Western optimists of the nineteenth century, as he describes them,<br />
swiftly conquered 85% of the earth.<br />
Berman’s knowledge of Islam is, to say the least, shaky. He states: “Islamism<br />
got under way in Pakistan in the 1930s (organizationally in 1941),” when<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
Pakistan was still only a flickering gleam in Jinnah’s eye. (Perhaps he means<br />
the Punjab, or part of it, but how did this get past the editors?) Pious<br />
people—one can be pious about a secular ideology too—are very scary<br />
critters mostly because their piety usually conceals nasty motives.<br />
Throughout the wobbly course of this book he writes as if religion or<br />
ideology alone dictates action, with no attention needed for underlying<br />
political or economic drives.<br />
Sayyid Qutb, Berman’s key Islamic figure, was a sort of Muslim Straussian,<br />
an elitist textual interpreter who spun out an Islam-based theory of<br />
alienation. Here was the very same siren song every cult belts out: we offer<br />
safe harbor in the bosum of Abraham or Allah or L. Ron Hubbard in<br />
exchange for every earthly thing you’ve got. Qutb blamed Socrates’ belief in<br />
reason for the ensuing split between materiality and spirit, which inflicted a<br />
“hideous schizophrenia” on poor humanity. Even so, Qtub had his lucid<br />
moments: as when remarking that John Foster Dulles “wants merely to<br />
mobilize a religiously-veneered patriotism that might protect the western<br />
order from communism.” The Saudis too were keen to keep their restive<br />
populace in line via importing Qutb’s severe brand of religion. The big<br />
question is how widespread is this doctrine?<br />
Berman says that the governing elite of Pakistan (presumably Zia) viewed<br />
Islamist fundamentalists as better neighbors than secular Marxist ones.<br />
(Washington certainly hoped so too, and dished out cash and arms<br />
accordingly.) Berman claims that Shariah law in Khomeini’s Iran after 1979<br />
“excited admiration and envy in the Arab and Muslim world.” If so, why was<br />
it not instituted in every Muslim majority state? Berman says that the<br />
Taliban were celebrated through the Islamic world.” Evidence, please. His<br />
whole case rests on the uniqueness of the Islamic fundamentalist threat. So he<br />
mentions Sadat’s assassination by a Muslim fundamentalist in 1981 but<br />
omits that of Rabin by a Jewish fundamentalist in 1994. Berman’s answer for<br />
all our worldly woes is “pathological mass movements.” This diagnosis allows<br />
him to remark on “communism morphing into nationalism” in former<br />
Yugoslavia without bothering to pry into the role that neo-liberal Western<br />
banks had in demolishing the federation in the first place.<br />
Berman scolds the sappy hand-wringing Left for being seduced by Stalin,<br />
Mao and Pol Pot—all of whom at one time or another were allied with the<br />
U.S. government (which, as we all know, was in thrall to sappy handwringing<br />
leftists). He then castigates a faction of 1930s French socialists for<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Kurt Jacobsen<br />
an imprudent anti-war stance but somehow fails to mention the French<br />
Right’s hearty slogan “Better Hitler than Blum.” He blandly compares peace<br />
demonstrations today to 1930s appeasers. Indeed, dissenters are pictured as<br />
nothing less than dyspeptic collaborators with the rabid Taliban whom the<br />
West subsequently did not so much bomb as bribe into submission. So those<br />
teeming Muslim fanatics know the value of a dollar after all which,<br />
perversely, is a hopeful sign. Nonetheless, Berman envisions a long “war<br />
between liberalism and the apocalyptic and phantasmagorical movements.”<br />
Noam Chomsky is pilloried for explaining “every last quirk of human<br />
behavior by invoking a tiny number of factors,” unlike, say, the professions of<br />
economics or sociology or political science. Berman, by contrast, narrows our<br />
buzzing, blooming confusion down tidily to one factor, those darned<br />
pathological mass movements. So he apparently believes that Pol Pot would<br />
have slouched toward Phnom Penh for his own inscrutable Oriental reasons,<br />
and without the midwivery of B-52 carpet bombing or bloody “incursions.”<br />
Nothing distresses Berman more than the fact that while American media<br />
sagely regard Chomsky as a “crank,” much of the rest of the planet treats him<br />
as a voice worth heeding. But what ultimately becomes crystal clear is that for<br />
Berman the whole planet now is pretty much a “pathological mass political<br />
movement” mobilizing irrationally to resist the liberal national interests of<br />
the United State, as ordained by born again George W. Bush.<br />
Kurt Jacobsen is research fellow in the Department of Political Science at the<br />
University of Chicago.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
T<br />
Jason Schulman<br />
Review<br />
Heaven on Earth: The Rise and Fall of Socialism<br />
by Joshua Muravchik<br />
reviewed by<br />
Jason Schulman<br />
here are, to be sure, intelligent right-wing critiques of socialism, as both<br />
concept and practice. Joshua Muravchik’s The Rise and Fall of Socialism,<br />
however, does not constitute such a critique. Its greatest failing is that it<br />
simply has nothing new to say, and as is to be expected, what it does have to<br />
say is largely wrong.<br />
Supposedly, Joshua Muravchik is to be taken seriously because he comes<br />
from a socialist family and he was the national chairman of the youth section<br />
of the Socialist Party, USA, from 1968 until 1973. But Muravchik’s SP was a<br />
quite different animal than it was in the days of Eugene V. Debs, dominated<br />
as it was by supporters of the Vietnam War. Anti-Communism had become<br />
the sole motivating factor for “socialists” of Muravchik’s stripe, hence their<br />
general move toward neoconservatism was perfectly predictable. Like his<br />
erstwhile comrades from the former SP (now inaccurately calling itself “Social<br />
Democrats USA”), Muravchik has moved from anti-Communism to a<br />
wholesale rejection of all strands of socialism. His understanding of<br />
“socialism” largely reduces it to a notion of state- (or communal colony-)<br />
driven social engineering to achieve earthly perfection. There have always<br />
been what the American Marxist Hal Draper called “the two souls of<br />
socialism”: that of “enlightened” elites autocratically seeking to create<br />
“rational” societies, and that of ordinary people working toward a world<br />
where all institutions are accountable and socially-produced wealth is<br />
democratically controlled by those who create it. Muravchik sees only elites,<br />
and the “other soul” of socialism is left unexamined. Do not expect to find an<br />
index entry for “workers’ self-management” in this book.<br />
Little of what Muravchik says about Gracchus Babeuf or Robert Owen is<br />
controversial. Babeuf, as Draper once wrote, spearheaded the idea of the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
Educational Dictatorship of benevolent anti-capitalists. Owen was also elitist,<br />
but Muravchik is considerably easier on him because he was a nonrevolutionary<br />
who “recognized that there was no need to seize power.<br />
Endowed with some land and capital, socialists could form their own<br />
communities.” Commenting on the failure of Owen’s utopian society, New<br />
Harmony—and, later in the book, the Israeli kibbutzim—Muravchik offers<br />
the traditional “socialism goes against human nature” canard: “If men were<br />
angels then an economy might succeed without selfish incentives, but if men<br />
were angels it would not matter whether the economy succeeded since they<br />
would have no material needs.” Whatever relevance this may have to the<br />
socialism of utopian colonists, it is irrelevant as a critique of political<br />
democratic socialism, which has always acknowledged the importance of<br />
“selfish” incentives under conditions of (relative) scarcity. Men and women<br />
are indeed not angels, and among capitalism’s problems is that it encourages<br />
them to be devils: the market encourages every individual to regard and treat<br />
all others as means to earn his or her living, just as it compels every firm to<br />
act as if it were the center of the universe, never mind the “externalities.”<br />
Muravchik’s analysis of Marx and Engels similarly lacks depth. Besides<br />
attributing the phrase “property is theft” to “Marxism”—it was the anarchist<br />
forefather Pierre Joseph-Proudhon who coined it—he rehashes the<br />
controversy of Marx’s use of anti-Semitic language, specifically the stereotype<br />
of Jews as merchant-hucksters. Muravchik fails to mention that the language<br />
of Part II of Marx’s On the Jewish Question followed the view of the Jews’ role<br />
given in an essay On the Money System which had just been written by Moses<br />
Hess, one of the progenitors of Zionism. Subsequent Zionists used similar<br />
phraseology. 1 Marx supported legal equality and civil rights for Jews; his<br />
analysis was that Jews were essentially a commercial class within medieval<br />
Europe, and the Jewish religion was an ideology reflecting the outlook of this<br />
class. While it is certainly true that Marx wrote terrible things in his personal<br />
letters to Engels, such as his derision of German socialist leader Ferdinand<br />
Lassalle as a “Jewish nigger,” even as he publicly opposed black slavery in the<br />
United States, this merely proves that Marx was, in fact, a nineteenth century<br />
European. There was nothing anti-Semitic in the politics of Marx and<br />
Engels—unless one considers atheism to be objectively anti-Semitic, and even<br />
then, Marx opposed the attempt by Mikhail Bakunin and his followers to<br />
make atheism an official doctrine of the International Workingmen’s<br />
Association. Whatever Marx’s personal failings, the movement that took his<br />
name was in no way anti-Semitic. August Bebel famously attacked anti-<br />
Semitism as “the socialism of fools”; Karl Kautsky denounced New<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
Testament authors for demonizing the Jews and inciting hatred against them<br />
as the murderers of Christ in his book, The Foundations of Christianity; Lenin<br />
wrote “it is not the Jews who are the enemies of the working people” but “the<br />
capitalists of all countries.” 2<br />
Muravchik claims that Marx and Engels “reconnected socialism to the thrill<br />
of violence”—as if they ever supported violence for its own sake, or ever said<br />
that countries which were sufficiently democratic and non-militarized might<br />
achieve socialism by peaceful means. He dismisses Capital as “ponderous”<br />
and “blather”; one wonders what the noted conservative economist Joseph<br />
Schumpeter saw in it. (Of course, Schumpeter could understand the<br />
difference between use-value and exchange-value; Muravchik is confounded<br />
by such stuff. Then again, he terms class struggle to be “high theory,” i.e., not<br />
real.)<br />
He attacks the duo for seeing themselves as “leaders of the proletariat”—<br />
never part of Marx and Engels’s self-description—despite their lack of<br />
working class roots. Indeed, this is a frequent theme in Muravchik’s book:<br />
real workers always become, at the most, reformist social democrats, while<br />
revolutionaries are always from the affluent classes (this former member of<br />
the American SP seems to know nothing of Eugene Debs’s background) and<br />
socialism itself is ultimately an ideology imported into the working class by<br />
intellectuals from outside it. Irony of ironies, Muravchik’s view is a sort of<br />
inverted Trotskyism: it is socialism, not ordinary reformism, which represents<br />
the influence of “alien class forces” on the proletariat! Missing in all this is<br />
any acknowledgement of the commitment by Marx and Engels to “winning<br />
the battle of democracy,” as The Communist Manifesto puts it, or any<br />
examination of their role in transforming socialism from a doctrine of<br />
wealthy colony-founders and secret conspirators to a doctrine of workingclass<br />
self-emancipation from exploitation. A serious critique of Marx and<br />
Engels would comment on their real flaws: their denigration of the role of<br />
moral values and individual rights in promoting socialist goals and their<br />
belief that an abundant communist society would transcend the need to<br />
deliberate politically about its economic priorities. Instead, Muravchik merely<br />
offers the conservative same-old same-old.<br />
Muravchik is far nicer to Eduard Bernstein, who embraced the goals of<br />
“more political and social legislation, better pay and working conditions”<br />
while abandoning the idea of a socialist “final goal.” While in retrospect,<br />
Bernstein’s rejection of orthodox Marxist teleology was correct, the ultimate<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
result of the logic of Bernstein’s politics has lately been turned against its own<br />
reformist ends. For if the logic of Bernsteinian social democracy has been, as<br />
<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong> puts it, “the achievement of incremental reforms<br />
through calculable compromises with the party as broker,” 3 the role of social<br />
democracy is now, in our age of capitalist globalization, at best to polish the<br />
sharpest edges of corporate power—a role embraced by Tony Blair, whom<br />
Muravchik praises as an “undertaker” of socialism. Similarly, Clement Atlee<br />
gets off easy because he was a gradualist social democrat, though still deluded<br />
about the ostensible benefits of public ownership. The difficulties of the Atlee<br />
government and, decades later, the sudden about-face of the radical-reformist<br />
Mitterand government of France supposedly illustrate the folly of socialist<br />
interference in the market. In reality, they are simply examples of the<br />
perennial dilemma that socialist governments face: the specter of capital<br />
flight, the constraints imposed by the need for continued private investment.<br />
The twentieth century’s exemplar of the radical-democratic “other soul” of<br />
socialism, Rosa Luxemburg, is dismissed by Muravchik as a “child of<br />
privilege” whose mantra was “the spontaneity of the masses,” an oft-stated<br />
myth. Lenin, of course, is demonized, and while Lenin’s thought and<br />
political practice deserves sharp criticism, Muravchik mostly offers the<br />
traditional fallacies, claiming that the Bolshevik revolution was a mere coup<br />
d’etat and attributing all its tragedies to Leninism’s innate evil and nothing to<br />
the civil war in which the Bolsheviks were fighting a full scale invasion by<br />
fourteen different states. 4 Lenin—who supposedly ordered “tens of thousands<br />
of deaths,” though no proof is offered—gets blamed not only for Stalinism<br />
but also for fascism because of his supposed similarities with Mussolini, a<br />
former member of the Italian Socialist Party; the Fascists supposedly believed<br />
themselves the “true heirs” of Lenin despite their anti-Marxism. Muravchik<br />
goes so far as to claim that “Mussolini’s rule rested far more on popular<br />
support than Lenin’s.” All he proves in his chapter on fascism is that the<br />
“logic” of anti-internationalist anti-capitalism leads in fascist directions. 5 And<br />
while few will disagree with Muravchik’s assessment of the bureaucraticallydirected<br />
“African socialism” of the late Tanzanian president Julius Nyerere,<br />
he takes no notice that even Tanzania has suffered much less than some of its<br />
neighbors who never strayed from the World Bank/IMF orthodoxy, such as<br />
Rwanda and Burundi. The “free market” has devastated postcolonial Africa.<br />
Capitalism has failed Africa as surely as has “Ujamaa.”<br />
The heroes of Muravchik’s book are Samuel Gompers and George Meany,<br />
for their role in making America “impervious to socialism.” “Pure and simple<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
unionism,” Gompers style, supposedly represented “true” trade unionism<br />
uncorrupted by middle-class socialist intellectuals who cared nothing for<br />
“meliorating the immediate conditions of the workers.” The historic<br />
opposition of Gompers’s American Federation of Labor to the inclusion of<br />
women, blacks, Mexican Americans, Chinese Americans, or most unskilled<br />
laborers in the labor movement is ignored, as is the autocratic nature of the<br />
unionism that he consolidated. Meany is praised for being an enthusiastic<br />
Cold Warrior who purged Communists from American unions and<br />
“rid[ding] the movement of racial discrimination.” The truth is that Meany<br />
opposed the historic March on Washington in 1963, and whatever efforts he<br />
did put toward anti-racist measures—such as lobbying for the 1965 Civil<br />
Rights Bill—were done in order to stave off criticisms for having done little<br />
in the past; he was far more interested in fighting Communists (and left<br />
critics) than fighting racists. Muravchik, of course, identifies with Meany’s<br />
support of the Vietnam War and his animosity toward the peace movement<br />
(Meany once denounced peaceniks as “fags”). He glosses over the merger of<br />
the foreign operations of the AFL-CIO with the counterintelligence sections<br />
of the CIA and their reactionary consequences both in Latin America and at<br />
home. He repeats the falsehood that Meany molded the labor movement<br />
“into a mighty force in American life.”<br />
The truth is that, as Paul Buhle writes, labor’s support for U.S. imperialism<br />
“paid virtually all of its [job-creating] benefits in the short run, and to a<br />
relatively select proportion of working people. Rather than reproducing<br />
union loyalty, the defense-linked rise of Sun Belt industry created large<br />
pockets of white working class conservatism, just as big-ticket construction of<br />
suburbs reinforced racial boundaries and in several different ways greatly<br />
diminished prospects of union democracy. The environmental recklessness of<br />
everything-for-production, taken with hypocritical race policies and a<br />
staggering indifference to the expanding clerical (especially female) sectors of<br />
the workforce, made the labor movement increasingly unpalatable and<br />
unsuccessful as time went on.” 6 The weakness of the U.S. labor movement<br />
today is the legacy of Cold War business unionism. To this, Muravchik is<br />
indifferent; it is, after all, working class conservatism that he supports, or<br />
more precisely working class support for the “American counter-model” to<br />
socialism. As the Stalinists of yesteryear saw the USSR or China as the<br />
Vanguard Country, so Muravchik sees America as the Vanguard, the envy of<br />
the world. No, America has “not always been loved,” but its imperialism is<br />
only “supposed.” Given how many people around the world currently see the<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
U.S. as the world’s main danger to peace, the publication of such comments<br />
could not have been more ill timed.<br />
Muravchik sees the dying out of the Israeli kibbutzim as the final nail in<br />
socialism’s coffin. But the kibbutzim, regardless of their adoption of the<br />
formula “to each according to their needs” (an impossibility under conditions<br />
of scarcity) or adoption of communal childrearing (not much of a priority<br />
outside of utopian colonies), were hardly pure institutions. In 1964, ninetytwo<br />
percent of kibbutzim were affiliated to companies which sold goods<br />
produced for a profit. This profit ended up in the hands of companies such as<br />
Koor (a major company of construction and manufacturing company) and<br />
AMPAL (American Israel Corporation, a finance company that directed U.S.<br />
capital investment in Israel), not Israeli workers. During the 1960s, more<br />
than fifty percent of kibbutz labor was wage labor, not voluntary labor, with<br />
the “dirty jobs” performed by foreign Jewish volunteers. This is not to<br />
mention the kibbutzim’s role in helping the Haganah army to drive out Arab<br />
inhabitants who had not already fled, confiscating their land, and later<br />
destroying the remaining houses—not exactly behavior exemplifying<br />
proletarian internationalism. 7 And the increasing social inequality in Israel,<br />
mirroring that in the U.S., goes unmentioned by Muravchik.<br />
Muravchik’s book ends with a return to the theme of socialism-as-religion,<br />
stating that in contrast to traditional religion, socialism “lacks any internal<br />
code of conduct to limit what believers may do. The socialist narrative turned<br />
history into a morality play without the morality.” Democratic socialism, he<br />
says, is a contradiction in terms; socialism is inevitably coercive. Of course,<br />
capitalism is coercive—it is based upon the coercion of market forces, backed<br />
up by state power. History has shown that capitalism is compatible with the<br />
most coercive possible governments, including ones that claim to be<br />
“socialist.” Capitalism is itself innately authoritarian. But the whole point of<br />
socialism, when it has not been hijacked by authoritarians, is not the elite<br />
engineering of the “New Man,” but the full democratization of political and<br />
economic power; indeed, the end of power itself as the organizing principle<br />
of social life. 8 This is the core of the “other soul” of socialism. It is still worth<br />
fighting for.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
Notes<br />
1 See Hal Draper, “Marx and the Economic-Jew Stereotype,” in Karl Marx’s<br />
Theory of Revolution, Vol.1: State and Bureaucracy (New York: Monthly<br />
Review Press, 1977), pp. 591-608.<br />
2 V.I. Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. 29 (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1972) p.<br />
252.<br />
3 <strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong>, Socialism Unbound, 2nd Edition (Boulder: Westview<br />
Press, 2000), p. 65.<br />
4 “With the country isolated within the international community, facing<br />
economic collapse and internal revolts, it was no wonder that the Bolsheviks<br />
should have become obsessed with unity, discipline, economic efficiency, and<br />
the administrative centralization of power.” <strong>Bronner</strong>, ibid., pp. 96-97.<br />
5 Muravchik argues that Nazism did not differ from traditional socialisms in<br />
its “virulence against despised peoples,” citing Marx’s desire for the<br />
“annihilation” of “Croats, Pandurs, Czechs and similar scum.” The context<br />
of those comments is the revolutionary upsurge of 1848, when on the<br />
promise of national autonomy (limited self-government)—and with the<br />
backing of Tsarist Russia—the Czechs, Croats, Slovenians and Ukrainians<br />
sided with the Hapsburg monarchy to smash the revolts of the Polish and<br />
Hungarian nationalists and the democrats of Vienna. Marx and Engels<br />
opposed the “principle of nationalities” (promulgated by Napoleon) as a<br />
doctrine that falsely claimed that all nations had the equal historical,<br />
geographical, political and industrial conditions for a viable independence.<br />
This doctrine was being used to justify the division and occupation of Poland<br />
and to incite the Serbs, Croats, Ukrainians, Slovaks, and Czechs. Marx and<br />
Engels supported the right of the great European nations to independence,<br />
but nationalities that were not struggling against imperial rule could claim no<br />
such right. They would never become nations and embark upon their own<br />
path of independent democratic development. Instead, civilization would be<br />
imposed on them by the great historic nations. A Darwinian view, perhaps,<br />
but not analogous to Nazi doctrine.<br />
6 Paul Buhle, Taking Care of Business: Samuel Gompers, George Meany, Lane<br />
Kirkland, and the Tragedy of American Labor (New York: Monthly Review<br />
Press, 1999), p. 2.<br />
7 See Benny Morris, The Birth of the Palestinian Refugee Problem (Cambridge:<br />
Cambridge University Press, 1987).<br />
8 This is how Ralph Miliband puts it in Socialism for a Sceptical Age (London:<br />
Verso, 1995), p. 57.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Jason Schulman<br />
Jason Schulman is a Ph. D. student in Political Science at the Graduate Center,<br />
CUNY.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
I<br />
Desmond Macnamara<br />
Review<br />
Why Orwell Matters<br />
By Christopher Hitchens<br />
Reviewed by<br />
Desmond Macnamara<br />
t might be best, before considering this book, to read something<br />
Christopher Hitchens wrote earlier this spring as the Iraq invasion loomed:<br />
There will be no war. There will be a fairly brief<br />
and ruthless military intervention. The President<br />
will give an order. The attack will be rapid,<br />
accurate and dazzling. It will be greeted by the<br />
majority of the Iraqi people as an emancipation”<br />
Possibly Hitchens makes no claim as a military strategist, though some might<br />
feel that such a dubious prophecy might call into question his attempt at an<br />
appraisal of George Orwell’s inner beliefs and motives. One can only imagine<br />
what Orwell would say about current events, but it is difficult to imagine<br />
Orwell backing Hitchens, Bush and Blair in that affair. Orwell died in 1950<br />
and most of his celebrated works were based on events leading to the brink of<br />
the Cold War—a very different era from present days of woe. <strong>Eric</strong> Arthur<br />
Blair (George Orwell) came from a family of British colonial civil servants<br />
“serving” in Bengal (his father worked for the Opium Department of the<br />
government of India) in the unanticipated twilight of the empire, an<br />
institution that started to bleed steadily after the 1916 uprising in Dublin.<br />
As a child, young Blair, as was the custom, was shipped home from India to<br />
England (not Scotland, as his name suggests: Perthsire is full of Blairs: Blair<br />
Gowrie, Blair Athol and so forth) for an education. He very properly was<br />
installed in a public school, those expensive and very unpublic forcing-beds<br />
of empire and Latin verbs, where the White Man’s Burden was laid on the<br />
shoulders of the whitest of white flannels on the cricket field. The best<br />
educated (or the best connected) formed the administration for successive<br />
governments which presided over palm and pine.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Desmond Macnamara<br />
There were exceptions emerging from such highfalutin institutions, of course:<br />
liberals and finally socialists, a valiant though mixed lot, some of whom<br />
claimed Orwell as one of their own. After public school, Blair joined the<br />
Burmese Police, the bigoted cruelties and mindset of which drove him<br />
rapidly back to Europe. A rather notorious event (and essay) involving the<br />
shooting of a rogue elephant led to his resignation and utter rejection of<br />
imperialism. This anti-imperialist and anti-authoritarian mode remained<br />
with him until his tragic early death and underlaid his staunch socialist<br />
beliefs. It also determined his later detestation of Stalinism (begun during the<br />
Spanish Civil War in Barcelona, but also, one supposes, his earlier doubts<br />
about Trotskyism, despite his connections with the PUOM in Spain in<br />
1936). By this time, <strong>Eric</strong> Blair had morphed promisingly into George<br />
Orwell.<br />
He resolutely embarked on an examination of society’s outcasts which<br />
resulted in Down and Out in London and Paris, which would make you never<br />
want to work or dine out in a posh restaurant again, and then The Road to<br />
Wigan Pier, considering the unemployed wasteland of northern England.<br />
The pier ordinarily is a symbol of English seaside gaiety. Being inland, Wigan<br />
had no pier, only junctions of derelict canals built in a bygone era of<br />
prosperity. Keep the Aspidistra Flying opened the lid on the lower middle<br />
classes, exposing their poverty of thought and their pretensions to<br />
respectability. (A lamentable condition also to be found in some areas of the<br />
solid, securely employed workers.)<br />
When it finally appeared in 1945 after rejections, according to Orwell, by<br />
four publishers, Animal Farm raised the ire of those (including most people<br />
in wartime Britain) who hailed our gallant Soviet allies at Stalingrad, and the<br />
outcry even led to calls for its banning. Imagine that. Published a few years<br />
later, 1984 was never intended as a satire on socialism, as conservative<br />
commentators smugly would have it, but as a bleak caricature of an overregulated<br />
dictatorial society, whatever the “ism” underlying it. The book<br />
depicted a drab world, heavily administered with a ration of one egg and two<br />
pieces of cheese a week, unrationed whale steak and a morsel of meat. The<br />
future offered no flicker of light or hope, and words had all degenerated into<br />
the stuff of slogans. The post-Yalta world of zones and euphemism seemed to<br />
a dying tubercular man an era of unconscionable doublespeak.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Desmond Macnamara<br />
Hitchens structures his book into separate essays rather than chronological<br />
chapters: Orwell on empire, on Englishness, on English medieval heritage, on<br />
the left and right, on America and on feminism. In the course of this<br />
judicious categorizing of Orwell’s vision of splendors and frailties, he is<br />
portrayed, in Hitchens’s rendering, as a slightly cantankerous gentlemen from<br />
the Shires who soon turns upside down the conventional Tory assumptions<br />
with which he was overladen. Orwell becomes an unapologetic socialist of<br />
perceptive honesty who nonetheless rejected anything inconsistent with his<br />
own views and standards. It earned him enemies, and earned him praise from<br />
some of those whom he would have despised.<br />
Every essay stands alone; joined only by Hitchens’s analysis of Orwell’s<br />
beliefs as descried in his writing. Understandably, there is a multitude of<br />
judgments trotted out here to be embraced or disdained. On the question of<br />
Orwell’s attitude to women, for example, Hitchens is absolutely right. The<br />
women in his novels are dull, unimaginative and universally unintellectual,<br />
although his late marriage to an Irish woman may have been a mercifully<br />
happy one.<br />
This year is the 100th anniversary of Orwell’s birth, and new books are<br />
appearing. Thomas Pynchon has produced a biography and an intriguing tale<br />
of espionage is added to the Orwell history after sixty years, by Gordon<br />
Bowker. Hitchens, however, is more concerned with Orwell’s oeuvre and<br />
attitudes than with biographical details and Catalonian adventures. Orwell<br />
too was an essayist and, interestingly, another still widely read essayist is<br />
being celebrated in London this spring. William Hazlitt’s tombstone has just<br />
been re-erected in London’s Soho. Both men inspired later writers as well as<br />
generations of appreciative readers. Neither was an academic—indeed,<br />
Hazlitt despised academics. Perhaps donnish attitudes were more aridly<br />
classical in his day. But Orwell was a writer and journalist and chose<br />
(unhappily for him, happily for us) the Burmese police force to transform his<br />
view of the world. Why Orwell Matters is a lively guide to Orwell’s thought<br />
and personality. The treatment of the subjects in the essays is always<br />
interesting and generally acceptable, even if the some of the author’s recent<br />
activities may not seem so. The latter need not, in all instances, affect the<br />
former.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Desmond Macnamara<br />
Desmond MacNamara Irish-born, is a retired lecturer in art, a sculptor, and<br />
author of five books, including The Book of Intrusions (Dalkey Archive Press,<br />
1994). He has written for the New Statesman, The Tablet, Studies: An Irish<br />
Quarterly Review and other periodicals. Several works are on display in the Irish<br />
National Gallery and National Writer's Museum in Dublin.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
J<br />
Diana Judd<br />
Review<br />
Straw Dogs by John Gray<br />
Reviewed by<br />
Diana Judd<br />
ohn Gray has a bone to pick. His latest book, Straw Dogs, takes aim at a<br />
host of targets in what appears to be a wholesale deconstruction of human<br />
thought. Religion, humanism, philosophy, belief in progress (indeed, belief<br />
in anything), industrialization, even civilization itself has, according to Gray,<br />
kept us from realizing our true nature: that we are just one more species of<br />
animal. And since “other animals do not need a purpose in life . . . can we<br />
not think of the aim of life as being simply to see?”<br />
In two hundred pages of text, Gray never explains what this means. Instead,<br />
the reader is treated to an array of disconnected quotations from Aristotle to<br />
Zarathustra, none of which serve to illustrate a coherent argument. Straw<br />
Dogs does contain moments where important topics such as the environment<br />
and the idea of progress, the future of genetic engineering and its effect on<br />
humanity, and the underlying philosophies of western and eastern religions<br />
are raised. Yet Gray merely dabbles on the surface of these issues (each of<br />
which would require a separate volume to explore), content merely to<br />
mention their existence. The end result is an incoherent book which goes<br />
nowhere and says very little. Gray’s final message—that humanity’s purpose<br />
in life should be “simply to see,” yet the human animal “cannot do with out a<br />
purpose,” is at best anti-climatic and at worst a failure to tie together its<br />
preceding chapters.<br />
The book is a string of aphorisms, each varying wildly in both length and<br />
subject matter. No doubt Gray was influenced by such works as Nietzsche’s<br />
Human, All Too Human and Adorno’s Minima Moralia, but Straw Dogs lacks<br />
both the depth and coherence that characterize those two works. What’s<br />
more, his aphoristic format seems forced. Gray states in his acknowledgments<br />
that though his thoughts are presented in “fragments,” they are not<br />
unsystematic. He also writes that the aphorisms may either be read in<br />
sequence or “dipped into at will.” Whatever his intentions, the overall effect<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Diana Judd<br />
of his schema is a nearly random flitting from topic to topic, his thoughts<br />
never alighting long enough to explore any one of them in useful detail.<br />
Gray’s book contains many inconsistencies and contradictions. Among the<br />
most egregious is his treatment of science. On the one hand, Gray states that<br />
“the origins of science are not in rational inquiry but in faith, magic and<br />
trickery,” while on the other hand he equates science with technology, from<br />
which, according to Gray, its power flows. While he does not go so far as to<br />
declare that technology is trickery or magic, the implication is clear.<br />
Furthermore, his stance that the origins of science lie in magic and trickery<br />
while its success lies in superior rhetoric betrays a fundamental<br />
misunderstanding of the history and philosophy of science. It is rather<br />
surprising that a professor of European Thought at the London School of<br />
Economics would so thoroughly neglect both Francis Bacon and Rene<br />
Descartes.<br />
Another inconsistency lies in Gray’s extensive usage of quotations from both<br />
western and eastern philosophy to buttress his argument that philosophy is so<br />
much bunk obscuring the truth about humanity. In addition, he continually<br />
references Darwin (without once explaining the actual theory of evolution)<br />
and recent advances in genetic research to illustrate his point that humans are<br />
merely animals and should consider themselves as such, while at the same<br />
time relentlessly decrying science and its origins. Apparently, Gray believes<br />
that neither Darwin’s theory of evolution nor genetic research fall under the<br />
rubric of science, or for that matter, philosophy as he understands it.<br />
All in all, Straw Dogs is a confusing book with no useful underlying message.<br />
While Gray does at times raise some interesting and controversial topics, his<br />
treatment of them is too brief and shallow to justify a serious perusal of the<br />
work. No doubt Gray intended Straw Dogs to be a work of popular<br />
philosophy and not an academic offering. It is a shame that he thinks the<br />
former must be characterized by inconsistency, contradiction, and<br />
superficiality.<br />
Diana Judd received her Ph. D. in Political Science from Rutgers University.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
D<br />
Robert J. Antonio<br />
Review<br />
The Spector of Democracy<br />
by Dick Howard<br />
Reviewed by<br />
Robert J. Antonio<br />
ick Howard’s The Spector of Democracy is composed primarily of recent<br />
essays revised for this volume. They express ideas that he has been<br />
developing for about three decades. Cutting a broad swath, he critically<br />
explores the relations between theory, history, and politics. The essays reflect<br />
his intellectual journey—his early engagements with Marx, the Frankfurt<br />
School, and, especially, Claude Lefort and Cornelius Castoriadis, his later<br />
works on politics, political judgment, and French and American political<br />
history, and his current ideas about Marx and political theory after<br />
communism. Howard’s post-Marxist theoretical argument provides a<br />
connective thread in the loosely integrated essays. He states that re-engaging<br />
Marx is timely in a “post-1989 world that wants to replace political choice by<br />
submission to the ‘natural necessity’ of the market.” 1 He contends that Marx’s<br />
effort to conjure up proletarian revolutionary subjectivity from technical<br />
progress and economic crisis has a similar “antipolitical” thrust. Howard (p.<br />
10) holds that “Marx was essentially a philosopher,” but that his attempt to<br />
radically historicize Hegelianism, translating it into a materialist theory of<br />
historical rationality and social progress, subordinated his philosophical critique<br />
of alienation to a deterministic “sociology.” 2 According to Howard, Marx’s<br />
practice of “philosophy by other means”obscured the normative nature of his<br />
critique, conflated the realm of freedom with necessity, and blinded him to the<br />
“democratic political implications of his own analysis” (emphasis in the original).<br />
Howard attempts to execute a complicated theoretical maneuver; he criticizes<br />
Marx’s sociological reduction of politics in order to recover the “philosophical<br />
Marx” and, then, ultimately go beyond him “to open the path to politics” and<br />
democracy that he sees to be absent in Marx (p. xiii).<br />
Howard acknowledges considerable debt to Lefort and Castoriadis, devoting<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
several chapters to their ideas and employing them throughout the book.<br />
Increasingly skeptical about communism after the suppressed 1956 Hungarian<br />
revolt, they and others in the Socialisme ou Barbarie circle declared the<br />
autonomy of politics from economic determination, engaged new forms of<br />
protest that went beyond class, and brought to the foreground communist<br />
repression, which generally had been ignored by the French left. As Howard<br />
explains, Lefort and Castoriadis saw Hegelian historicism to be a root of<br />
Marx’s reductive claim that progressive development of the mode of<br />
production leads inevitably to emancipation. Rather than an advance over<br />
Hegelian idealism, they argued, his materialism grants pseudohistorical<br />
necessity to contingent historical processes. Stressing an affinity for<br />
totalitarianism, they held that Marx’s historicism has been deployed by<br />
communist regimes and parties to justify the suppression of political<br />
opposition. Howard shares their view that Marxism neutralizes its own<br />
democratic political potentiality and that realization of it requires a radical<br />
break with historicism and a new openness to history.<br />
Howard also agrees with Lefort’s definition of the political as the “symbolic<br />
institution of society,” or creation and reproduction of the normative bases of<br />
societal institutions. Lefort held that pre-existing hierarchical societies limited<br />
these symbolic practices to élites, who fashioned “external or transcendent”<br />
religious and metaphysical legitimations to justify their dominance. As<br />
Howard explains, he argued that democracy seeks “unity from within” society<br />
and expects its “members to take responsibility for their own individuality.”<br />
Lefort held that democracy arose when the ancien régime collapsed and citizens<br />
asserted the “right to have rights,” or the right to demand from the state<br />
recognition of their individual rights. He portrayed democracy as a plural<br />
“public space” where diverse citizens and groups, empowered by their rights,<br />
engage in open-ended, historically-variable deliberations. In his view, the<br />
consequent “radical indeterminacy” rules out unified publics and determination<br />
by general social conditions. However, Lefort contended that these<br />
reductionist ideas are products of modern ideologies, which arise to ease<br />
uncertainty and mask contingency. For example, liberalism’s claims about a<br />
rational self-interested subject and the inevitable operations of “market forces”<br />
provide a sense a certainty about liberal society’s foundations that discourage<br />
consideration of political alternatives. Lefort believed that an independent,<br />
open civil society is the best bulwark against the ideological reflex’s antipolitics.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
Following Lefort, Howard holds that Marx’s sociological reduction and vision<br />
of materially-driven proletarian unity deny politics’ discursive, contingent<br />
nature and that these historicist ideas, combined with Marx’s highly negative<br />
view of civil society and liberal rights, constitutes a proto-totalitarian ideology<br />
(pp. 77-80, 116-18,166, 209-10, 327, note 10).<br />
Howard states that Castoriadis acknowledged that “Marx bet on history and<br />
lost” (i.e., his hopes about the emancipatory proletariat failed). Howard<br />
implies, however, that Castoriadis still carried on the Marxist project to<br />
transcend Hegelianism with the understanding that it required a much more<br />
radical break than Marx was willing to make. Howard shares Castoriadis’s goal<br />
of moving beyond historicist teleology to a position recognizing history’s<br />
uniqueness, autonomy, and contingency (pp. 87-88). By contrast, Howard<br />
argues, the Frankfurt School failed to make this decisive post-Marxist, post-<br />
Hegelian move and, when their revolutionary hopes crashed, they sought<br />
aesthetic transcendence and rejected “everyday politics” (pp.39-41). Howard<br />
speculates that their deeply pessimistic vision of consumer capitalism’s<br />
seamlessly integrated, depoliticized, “one-dimensional” culture helped inspire<br />
later postmodernist claims about the end of modernity and exhaustion of<br />
politics. In his view, this “antipolitics” or “politics of theory” manifest<br />
constricted political vision, rather than politics’ actual demise. Howard<br />
explains his youthful affiliation with Telos, stressing the initial trouble that he<br />
had getting that formerly left journal, which was then still operating in Marx’s<br />
tracks, to take up Lefort and Castoriadis. He did not mention, however, that<br />
the editor and his inner circle, at that time, posed an extreme version of the<br />
one-dimensionality thesis portraying a near total closure of historical<br />
contradictions and of immanent possibilities for progressive change. This view<br />
not only anticipated pessimistic forms of postmodernism, but the Telos inner<br />
circle’s consequent search for organic community led them to take up Carl<br />
Schmitt in the 1980s and, after, to make an anti-liberal, neopopulist turn.<br />
Howard devotes considerable attention to historical comparison of French and<br />
American political cultures. He holds that the framers of the French republican<br />
regime had to pose a new conception of unity to replace the old monarchy’s<br />
lost integration. Faced with the problem of fragmentation, Howard contends,<br />
they envisioned a republican state reviving political unity. He argues that the<br />
framers of the new French regime stressed inclusion at the national level,<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
calling for universal citizenship and state action to insure social and political<br />
rights and to secure social equality. By contrast, he explains, engaging a setting<br />
that lacked the ancien régime’s cultural and political unity, American framers<br />
forged a vision of a self-managed democracy that is composed of diverse<br />
communities and individuals and that secures inclusion through free<br />
association and minimal reliance on state power. He holds that adoption of<br />
judicial autonomy and competitive political parties made clear that rights had<br />
to be won and defended politically. Howard embraces American “republican<br />
democracy,” which he sees to be inherently pluralist, open, and dynamic, while<br />
he implies that the state-centered French “democratic republic” is prone to the<br />
sociological reduction and proto-totalitarian singularity that he says inheres in<br />
Marxism. Still, he argues that American democracy may also express<br />
antipolitical tendencies; e.g., its emphasis on individual rights can degenerate<br />
into a “procedural republic” manifesting “right over good,” legal formality, and<br />
social fragmentation. In his view, the republican idea in France as well as in the<br />
United States is “political” rather than “socio-economic” and, thus, can be<br />
employed critically against the sociological reduction and collective subjects<br />
(pp. 174, 184). Howard’s historical accounts of French and American<br />
republicanism are too complex to adequately summarize here. However, their<br />
unifying thread is emphatic critique of the reduction of discursively-mediated<br />
political action to general sociological contexts and fictive collective subjects,<br />
which he implies deprive politics of their historical particularity and complex,<br />
dynamic, plural, dispersed agency.<br />
Howard speaks briefly about a totalizing “politics of will” that posits—<br />
independent of political action—a “right thing to be done” and a “unified<br />
actor” to do it and about an opposed “politics of judgement” that reflects<br />
critically on the consequences of political action and acts prudently. Stressing<br />
the need to take “responsibility” for political decision, which the politics of<br />
will abjures, Howard suggests that the politics of judgement suffuse republican<br />
democracy and his own analyses (pp. 18-22, 30, 78, 74, 107, 194-96). He also<br />
mentions in passing Max Weber’s related “ethics of conviction” and “ethics of<br />
responsibility” (p. 236). These concepts were part of Weber’s broader posttraditional<br />
argument about political responsibility, which rejected ideas of<br />
historical necessity and collective subjects and the consequent aversion of<br />
political decision. Moreover, Weber warned that fanatical forms of conviction<br />
suspend ethical reflection as well as political prudence, justifying extreme<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
control, violence, and repression and giving rise to the total state. Addressing<br />
Weber might have prompted Howard to clarify his concepts of politics of will<br />
and politics of judgment, which are central to his argument, but are left<br />
unelaborated. John Dewey’s radical democratic theory also seems to converge<br />
at key points with Howard’s project. Dewey stressed democracy’s uncertain,<br />
plural, discursive, historically particular, incomplete, experimental nature. He<br />
aimed to fashion a radically historicist, antifoundationalist democratic<br />
alternative to Hegelian historicism that breaks as fundamentally from modern<br />
ideas of historical necessity as it does from traditional metaphysics, religion,<br />
and political philosophy. Also, Dewey posed his mature social theory contra<br />
totalitarianism—Fascism and Stalinism. Engaging Dewey critically also might<br />
have sharpened Howard’s argument. However, his failure to address these<br />
particular thinkers is not problematic per se. Rather, the problem is that he<br />
does not situate adequately his theory relative to related political theories and<br />
social theories. Developing this theoretical context would have helped Howard<br />
bring forward more clearly and completely his overall position on democracy<br />
and its connections to current historical and political contexts.<br />
Howard’s unqualified claims about the “autonomy” and “radical<br />
indeterminacy” of politics and negative comments about “the flat terrain of<br />
sociology” and the “mere sociologist” (pp. 77, 81) draw an overly sharp<br />
boundary between politics and its “sociological” contexts. Exaggerating the<br />
threat of sociological reduction, he largely ignores the interdependence between<br />
these relatively autonomous spheres. Moreover, he does not distinguish the<br />
pseudo-sociology employed in bogus historicist arguments from genuine<br />
sociological inquiry about conditions that influence the direction and content<br />
of politics. He recognizes passingly that sociological analysis may have a<br />
limited role in normative critique, but he does not explain that role and, being<br />
very wary of the “totalitarian temptation,” he asserts that such analysis easily<br />
turns reductive (p. 134). He also implies that a sociological moment in<br />
normative critique would be positivist, suggesting the kind of disembodied<br />
eye, oblivious to normative conditioning of social inquiry, that thinkers like<br />
Weber and Dewey dismissed early last century. By contrast, Howard does not<br />
acknowledge that philosophy, which he strongly privileges in political critique,<br />
may need a sociological moment to avert the very tendency “to fly above<br />
reality” that he attributes to positivism. Strong claims about autonomy may<br />
inhere in efforts to make radical breaks from powerful constraints, but these<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
moves still manifest the sociological context. Lefort’s and Castoriadis’s<br />
emphatic claims about autonomy and indeterminacy make sense in light of<br />
their effort to break politically, intellectually, and even personally from post-<br />
World War II communism and from its patently constrained politics and<br />
sterile deterministic theories. However, this context has faded long ago. Today,<br />
politically ambiguous Schmitteans and populists as well as “New Right”<br />
proto-fascists make similar strong claims about the autonomy of politics and<br />
attack sociological reduction in their critiques of globalization and<br />
neoliberalism. Howard surely opposes such positions, but the context of his<br />
own work is not clear and he does not explain its political relevance.<br />
Howard recognizes the problem. He says that he does “not want to leave the<br />
impression that the theoretical arguments presented here have no immediate<br />
political implications,” and he invites readers to his website to sample some of<br />
his recent “directly political” commentaries, which he says illustrate his<br />
“understanding of democracy as radical.” I accepted his invitation, but his<br />
many well-reasoned points about the American political climate in the wake of<br />
9/11 do not clarify the political direction of his overall argument and,<br />
especially, why it should be construed to be an extension of Marx or to be<br />
radically democratic. Howard analyzes how historicism and sociological<br />
reduction contribute to de-politicization and de-democratization, but he<br />
explains neither the current relevance of his strong claims about autonomy nor<br />
his overall substantive vision of democracy. Like Dewey, he stresses an affinity<br />
between historicism and democracy, but, by contrast to Dewey, he does not<br />
offer tools for a critique of “really existing” democracy—e.g., to evaluate<br />
whether the United States has “strong” or “weak” republican democracy and to<br />
suggest how it might be made “stronger” and more just. This is an ironic<br />
problem for a thinker who endorses political critique and democracy so<br />
enthusiastically.<br />
The issue of historicity and sociology brings us back to Marx. Howard’s<br />
critique of historical necessity addresses a deeply problematic thread in Marx’s<br />
work. However, he implies that determinism rules Marx’s analysis of<br />
capitalism. Howard does not acknowledge the side of Marx’s work that<br />
stresses sociological inquiry into the specific conditions of particular situations<br />
(i.e., recognizing the contingent nature of the social) and that employs<br />
concepts as heuristic devices (simplifying a contingent empirical world for<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
analytical purposes). Even young Marx countered his Hegelian side with points<br />
about the need to study “definite individuals” sharing historically-specific social<br />
and political relations. However, the materialist transparency promised at the<br />
end of the Manifesto’s famous passage about “all that is solid melts into air” is<br />
replaced, in his mature work, by a warning that the “appearance of simplicity<br />
vanishes.” In Capital, Marx spoke of an “economistic law of motion”<br />
operating with “iron necessity” and leading “inevitably” to proletarian<br />
emancipation. However, he also held that proliferation of “middle and<br />
intermediate strata,” in England, “obliterate lines of demarcation everywhere.”<br />
He understood that advanced capitalism’s complex class relations and<br />
interventionist state posed problems for his political hopes and that his social<br />
theory had to be brought to bear on increasingly diverse types of capitalism.<br />
Late in life, Marx even doubted that full capitalist modernization would<br />
extend beyond western Europe. His sociological uncertainty appears in other<br />
forms. For example, he conditioned his core materialist idea that the pumping<br />
out of surplus product from direct producers is “the hidden basis of the entire<br />
social structure” with the qualification that the process has “infinite variations<br />
and gradations in appearance, which can be ascertained only by analysis of the<br />
empirically given circumstances.” Similar qualifications about empirical<br />
variability appear in other parts of Capital, implying that Marx saw his theory<br />
as a heuristic model as well as the mirror of the Telos of History. The point is<br />
that Marx expressed two types of “historical” narratives—sociological<br />
historicism and Hegelian historicism. Howard criticizes sharply Marx’s<br />
historicism, but his position should be evaluated in the broader light of the<br />
tensions between and entwinement of his determinism and his sociology.<br />
Engels admitted after Marx’s death that he and Marx had exaggerated the<br />
“economic side,” but he also declared famously that their materialist method<br />
claimed nothing more than: “the ultimately determining element in history is<br />
the production of and reproduction of real life.” Holding that “all history<br />
must be studied afresh,” Engels insisted that they created “a guide to study, not<br />
a lever after the manner of the Hegelian.” 3 Engels’s afterthought understates the<br />
determinist thread in Marx’s and his materialism, but it stresses correctly the<br />
importance of their sociological historicism. The master narrative of their texts<br />
is still a matter of debate. However, Howard’s privileging of the “philosophical<br />
Marx” and reducing of his sociological side to Hegelianism understates the<br />
significance of his sociology. The enduring value of Marx’s work derives as<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
much from his sociology as from his normative ideas. His analysis of<br />
capitalism poses still compelling questions about its highly problematic<br />
relationship with democracy. His view that socio-economic matters condition<br />
fundamentally the shape, quality, and possibility of democracy and, thus, need<br />
to be taken account of in theory and practice does not by itself constitute a<br />
sociological reduction of politics. By contrast, unqualified emphasis on the<br />
autonomy of politics does not favor inquiry into the impacts of wealth and<br />
power on democracy, which are often concealed or intentionally suppressed.<br />
Addressing the impacts of expanded corporate power and increased economic<br />
inequality, under neoliberal globalization, is essential to today’s debates over<br />
the prospects for democracy and does not preclude the relative autonomy of<br />
politics or deny other forms exclusion. A theory of radical democracy must<br />
bring to the foreground the unequal and unjust distribution of the material<br />
and cultural means of participation. Marx’s impassioned emphasis on this<br />
matter gives him more than nine lives and is the reason that his specter still<br />
hangs over us today. In this light, Howard’s emphasis on the importance of<br />
Marx’s normative side makes sense. But Marx’s vision of capitalist inequality is<br />
the main point of conjuncture between his philosophy and sociology—his<br />
sociology provides his normative vision of justice specificity and historicity.<br />
That Howard is silent about the relation of capitalism and democracy raises<br />
questions about the methodological adequacy as well as the historicity of his<br />
claims about the autonomy of politics and his dim view of the sociological<br />
moment of criticism.<br />
Arguably Marx founded the tradition of modern “social theory.” Social<br />
theorists frame normative arguments, but their work is distinguished from<br />
earlier types of normative theory by a strong sociological moment. Although<br />
the borders are fluid, social theory’s normative thrust distinguishes it from<br />
more narrowly-focused, empirically-oriented “sociological theory” and social<br />
science. By contrast to religion and metaphysics the legitimacy of social theory<br />
depends on the discursively-mediated, empirical-historical validity of its<br />
“sociological” claims as well as the consistency, persuasiveness, and<br />
emotional/aesthetic force of its normative facets. Social theory’s project of<br />
providing an “historical” alternative to absolutist normative argument is neither<br />
complete nor transparent. First-generation social theorists, like Marx, often<br />
conflated History with history and tried to justify their practice as “science,”<br />
obscuring its normative thrust. Howard rightly criticizes this reduction, which<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
is still a problem today. However, as in Marx’s case, social theorists’ historicist<br />
and scientistic claims have often appeared alongside, in the same texts, valid<br />
types of sociological and normative argument. Today, after multiple waves of<br />
critiques of scientism, theorists sometimes deny or understate social theory’s<br />
empirical-historical side and, thus, lean back toward absolutism or simply fail<br />
to justify their normative practices at all. Howard does not make this error,<br />
but he suggests a rather narrowly construed conception of political theory that<br />
understates the role of sociological contexts in conditioning political action and<br />
political thought. The interdependence of the sociological and political<br />
moments call for a broader view of theory that takes fuller account of the fact<br />
that democracy is a “social thing.”<br />
That confusion still reigns over the nature of social theory and its boundaries<br />
with empirical-historical work has been easy to see in later 20th century<br />
polemics over postmodernism and other interdisciplinary theories. Opposing<br />
sides in these disputes have often pitted science and social theory against each<br />
other. By contrast, these practices, regardless of their independent logics, are<br />
culturally entwined; social theory provides a post-traditional language to debate<br />
the normative directions of science and policy and social science provides the<br />
historical knowledge for social theory arguments, in which normative<br />
justification depends largely on claims about the socio-cultural and political<br />
consequences of the proposed policy regimes. Howard’s critique of historicism<br />
contributes to the project of social theory. His points about the sociological<br />
reduction eroding political responsibility and sapping democratic vitality likely<br />
has as much cultural significance after communism, as they did when Lefort<br />
and Castoriadis posed their ideas. Recall Howard’s passing comment that his<br />
critique of Marxist antipolitics is relevant to neoliberalism; its collective<br />
subject, the rational economizer, and claims about the inevitable impacts of<br />
“market forces” suggest an abdication of political decision parallel to that<br />
generated by Marxist certainty about the emancipatory proletariat and<br />
communism. Hopefully, Howard will follow up on this provocative point,<br />
bringing to bear his broader argument about the political on neoliberalism,<br />
which will likely make his position clearer and perhaps answer the concerns<br />
that I have raised.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003
Robert J. Antonio<br />
Notes<br />
1 Dick Howard, The Spector of Democracy (New York: Columbia University<br />
Press, 2002), p. 287. Further page references to this work are in parentheses in<br />
the text of this essay.<br />
2 “Sociology” is used here to refer to social science, rather than to the explicit<br />
discipline of sociology. Howard identifies Marx’s “economic” theory as<br />
“sociological.” Marx’s historical materialism focuses on the social relationships<br />
by which ruling or dominant classes extract surplus from direct producers. His<br />
“labor theory of value” addresses the capitalist version of this social<br />
relationship.<br />
3 Frederick Engels, “Engels to Conrad Schmidt” and “Engels to Joseph Bloch”<br />
(Letters written in 1890), pp.395-400 in Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on<br />
Politics and Philosophy, edited by Lewis S. Feuer (Garden City, NY: Anchor<br />
Books, 1959).<br />
Robert J. Antonio is professor of Sociology at the University of Kansas.<br />
<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003